FINAL REPORT AFTER PUBLIC HEARINGenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/07102016… · · 2016-10-07JAYPEE CEMENT CORPORATION LIMITED (JCCL) GULBARGA ... 2.13 Resource Requirement

Environment Consultant :

Vimta Labs Limited

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally,

Hyderabad–500 051, Telangana State

www.vimta.com, [email protected] (NABL/ISO 17025 Certified Laboratory, Recognized by MoEF, New Delhi)

October, 2016

Approved Consultant

Project Proponent :

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR

THE PROPOSED TARANHALLI LIMESTONE MINE OF 7.0 MTPA CAPACITY

IN ML AREA OF 631.311 HA AT TARANHALLI AND SHAHABAD

VILLAGES, CHITTAPUR TEHSIL, GULBARGA (KALABURAGI) DISTRICT,

KARNATAKA

Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL)

Karnataka

FINAL REPORT AFTER PUBLIC HEARING

JAYPEE CEMENT CORPORATION LIMITED (JCCL) GULBARGA (KALABURAGI) DISTRICT IN KARNATAKA

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY

FOR THE PROPOSED TARANHALLI LIMESTONE MINE OF 7.0 MTPA CAPACITY IN ML AREA

OF 631.311 HA AT TARANHALLI AND SHAHABAD VILLAGES, CHITTAPUR TEHSIL,

KALABURAGI DISTRICT, KARNATAKA

For and on behalf of VIMTA Labs Limited

Approved by : M. Janardhan

Signature :

Designation : Head & Vice President (Env)

Date : October 7, 2016

The report has been prepared inline with the prescribed TOR issued vide letter No: J-

11015/399/2015-IA.II(M) dated 8th January, 2016 by Ministry of Environment, Forest

and Climate Change, New Delhi.

This report has been prepared by Vimta Labs Limited with all reasonable skill, care

and diligence within the terms of the contract with the client, incorporating our

General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources

devoted to it by agreement with the client.

PREFACE

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Taranhalli Limestone Mine of 7.0 MTPA Capacity in ML Area of 631.311 ha at Taranhalli and Shahabad Villages, Chittapur Tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) District, Karnataka

Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-1

Table of Contents _______________________________________________________________ Chapter Title Page _______________________________________________________________ Table of Contents TC-1 List of Figures TC-4 List of Tables TC-5 1.0 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Report C1-1 1.2 Identification of the Project Proponent C1-1 1.3 Project Background C1-2 1.4 Need for the Project and its importance to the Country C1-3 1.5 Project Details C1-4 1.6 Environmental Setting C1-5 1.7 Scope of the Study C1-6 1.8 Methodology of the Study C1-6 2.0 Project Description and Sources of Pollution

2.1 Type of the Project C2-1 2.2 Need of the Project C2-1 2.3 Details of Mine Operations C2-1 2.4 General Geology C2-3 2.5 Details of Exploration C2-8 2.6 Method of Mining C2-10 2.7 Extent of Mechanization C2-19 2.8 Mine Drainage C2-22 2.9 Disposal of Overburden C2-23 2.10 Use of Mineral C2-24 2.11 Conceptual Plan C2-24 2.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan C2-27 2.13 Resource Requirement C2-30 2.14 Sources of Pollution C2-33 3.0 Baseline Environmental Status

3.1 Introduction C3-1 3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology C3-1 3.3 Land use Studies C3-9 3.4 Soil Characteristics C3-11 3.5 Meteorology C3-14 3.6 Ambient Air Quality C3-22 3.7 Water Quality C3-27 3.8 Noise Level Survey C3-33 3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies C3-36 3.10 Demography and Socio-economics C3-45


Table of Contents


Table of Contents _______________________________________________________________ Chapter Title Page _______________________________________________________________

4.0 Impact Assessment

4.1 Introduction C4-1 4.2 Impacts during Mine Development Phase C4-1 4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase C4-3 4.4 Impact on Air Quality C4-5 4.5 Impact on Water Resources and Quality C4-13 4.6 Impact on Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations C4-22 4.7 Impact on Soil C4-26

4.8 Impact on Flora and Fauna C4-31 4.9 Impact on Landuse Pattern C4-34 4.10 Impact on Socio-economic Aspects C4-34 4.11 Impact on Places of Tourist/Religious/Historical

Importance C4-35 4.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan C4-35

5.0 Environment Management Plan 5.1 Introduction C5-1 5.2 Air Pollution Management C5-2 5.3 Water Pollution C5-4 5.4 Noise and Vibration C5-6 5.5 Reclamation and Rehabilitation C5-8 5.6 Waste Dump Management C5-9 5.7 Soil Conservation C5-10 5.8 Green Belt Development C5-10 5.9 Measures to Improve Socio-Economic Condition Of

Local Population C5-16 5.10 Environment Management System C5-16 5.11 Occupational Safety and Health C5-20 5.12 Training and Human Resources Development C5-21

6.0 Environmental Monitoring Programme

6.1 Implementation-Schedule of Mitigation Measures C6-1 6.2 Environmental Monitoring C6-1

6.3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis C6-3 6.4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumable C6-4 6.5 Occupational Health and Safety C6-5 6.6 Budgetary Allocation for Environmental Protection C6-5

7.0 Additional Studies

7.1 Public Consultation C7-1 7.2 Occupational Health and Safety C7-2 7.3 Risk Assessment C7-4 7.4 Disaster Management Plan C7-9


Table of Contents


Table of Contents _______________________________________________________________ Chapter Title Page _______________________________________________________________

8.0 Project Benefits

8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1

8.2 Corporate Social Responsibilities C8-1 8.3 Employment Potential C8-4 8.4 Rehabilitation Human Settlements C8-4

9.0 Administrative Aspects 9.1 Institution Arrangement s for Environment

Protection and Conservation C9-1 10.0 Summary and Conclusion 10.1 Need for the Project C10-1 10.2 Project Justification C10-1 10.3 Summary of Anticipated Environmental

Impacts and Mitigation C10-1 10.4 Conclusions C10-4 11.0 Disclosure of Consultants 11.1 Introduction C11-1 11.2 Vimta Labs Limited –Environment Consultant C11-1

List of Annexures

Annexure-I TOR Letter and its Compliance Annexure-II Letter from Mines Department Annexure-III Applicable Environment Standards Annexure-IV Methodology for Sampling and Analysis Annexure-V IBM Application Annexure-VI Water Allocation Letter Annexure-VII Land use Pattern based on Census Records Annexure-VIII Land use Report based on Satellite Image Annexure-IX Ambient Air Quality Levels Annexure-X Authenticated List of Flora and Fauna Annexure-XI Demographic Details Annexure-XII Public Hearing Details


Table of Contents


List of Figures _______________________________________________________________ Figure Title Page _______________________________________________________________

1.1 Index Map C1-7 1.2 Study Area Map C1-8 1.3(A) Google Image C1-11 1.3(B) Google Image C1-12 1.4 Site Photographs C1-13 2.1 Surface Plan of ML C2-5 2.2 Geological Plan of ML C2-6 2.3 Geological Sections C2-7 2.4 Flow sheet Indicating different Stage of Mining Operations C2-12 2.5 I Year Production Plan C2-13 2.6 II Year Production Plan C2-14 2.7 III Year Production Plan C2-15 2.8 IV Year Production Plan C2-16 2.9 V Year Production Plan C2-17 2.10 Year Wise Production Sections C2-18 2.11 Conceptual Plan C2-25 2.12 Conceptual Sections C2-26 2.13 Progressive Mine Closure Plan C2-29 3.2.1 Drainage Map of the Gulbarga District C3-3 3.2.2 Geological Map of the Gulbarga District C3-3 3.2.3 Hydrogeology Map of the Gulbarga District C3-5 3.2.4 Flood Zone Mapping C3-8 3.4.1 Soil Sampling Locations C3-12 3.5.1 Site Specific Winter Season Wind Rose -2016 C3-18 3.5.2 Pre- Monsoon & Monsoon Seasons – IMD Gulbarga C3-19 3.5.3 Post Monsoon & Winter Seasons – IMD Gulbarg C3-20 3.5.4 Annual Windroses – IMD Gulbarga C3-21 3.6.1 Air Quality Sampling Locations C3-23 3.7.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-29 3.8.1 Noise Monitoring Locations C3-35 3.9.1 Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecological Locations C3-39 4.1 Predicted Incremental GLCs C4-12 4.2 Drainage Map of ML Area C4-17 4.3 Water Balance Diagram C4-18 4.4 Recharge System for Administrative Block C4-20 4.5 Recharge System for Workshop C4-21 4.6 Recharge System for Paved Road Through Recharge Trench C4-22 4.7 Noise Dispersion Trend Around the Mine C4-27 5.1 Environment Management Plan C5-11 7.1 Identification of Hazards in Open Cast mine C7-8 7.2 Onsite Emergency Plan C7-15 7.3 Off Site Emergency Chart C7-20 8.1(A) CSR Photographs C8-5 9.1 Organizational Structure of Environment Cell C9-2


Table of Contents


List of Tables

Tables Title Page

1.1 Future Growth Rates of Different Markets C1-3

1.2 Trend of Future Demands of the Target Region C1-4 1.3 Details of Environmental Setting (10 Km Radius) C1-5 1.4 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring C1-9 2.1(A) Details of Land Use Pattern in ML Area C2-2 2.1(B) Land Use Pattern of Mine Lease C2-2 2.2 Salient Features of Limestone Mine C2-2 2.3 Mineral Resource Estimation C2-8 2.4 Category-Wise Reserves/Resources As on 01.03.2016 C2-9 2.5 Details of Excavation Quantities C2-11 2.6 Details of Mining Machinery C2-19 2.7 Details of Topsoil, Formation of Bund & Storage of Top Soil and Plantation C2-23 2.8 Abandonment Cost Estimated During the Plan Period C2-27 2.9 Water Requirement for ML Area C2-30 2.10 Point Sources in Mining Operations C2-34 2.11 Likely Noise Levels of the Major Mining Equipment C2-36 3.2.1 The Dynamic Groundwater Resources of Gulbarga District As on 31.03.2011 C3-7 3.3.1 Land Use Pattern in the Study Area C3-9 3.4.1 Details of Soil Sampling Locations C3-11 3.4.2 Soil Analysis Results C3-13 3.4.3 Standard Soil Classification C3-13 3.5.1 Summary of the Meteorological Data Generated at Site C3-15 3.5.2 Summary of Wind Pattern at the Study Area C3-15 3.5.3 Climatological Data-Station: IMD, Gulbarga C3-16 3.5.4 Summary of Wind Pattern – IMD Gulbarga C3-17 3.6.1 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring C3-24 3.6.2 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results – Winter 2015 C3-24 3.7.1 Details of Water Sampling Locations C3-27 3.7.2 Ground Water Quality C3-30 3.7.3 Surface Water Quality C3-32 3.8.1 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations C3-34 3.8.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area C3-34 3.9.1 Terrestrial Ecological Sampling Locations C3-38 3.9.2 List of Flora Observed in the Core Zone C3-40 3.9.3 List of Faunal Species Recorded in Core Area C3-40 3.9.4 List of the Flora of the Buffer Zone of the Study Area C3-41 3.9.5 Fauna from Buffer Zone C3-42 3.9.6 Details of Aquatic Sampling Locations C3-44 3.9.7 List of Phytoplankton Species Recorded from Study Area C3-45 3.9.8 List of Zooplankton Species Recorded from Study Area C3-45 3.10.1 Distribution of Population C3-46 3.10.2 Distribution of Population by Social Structure C3-48

3.10.3 Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates C3-48 3.10.4 Occupational Structure C3-49


Table of Contents


List of Tables (contd..)

Tables Title Page

4.1 Landuse during Pre, Operation & Conceptual Stage C4-4 4.2 Post Mining Land Use details C4-4

4.3 Source of Pollutants C4-7 4.4 Emission Factors for Mining Operations used for Modelling C4-11 4.5 Predicted 24-Hourly Short Term Incremental GLC’s C4-11 4.6 Water Balance C4-16 4.7 Permissible Peak Particle Velocity C4-23

4.8 Noise due to Excavation/Loading/Transportation C4-24 4.9 Top Soil Generation and Utilization C4-29

4.10 Details of Proposed Mined out land C4-35 4.11 Proposed Plantation & Bund details C4-36 5.1 Plantation Schedule C5-12

5.2 Species for Plantation C5-14 6.1 Recommended Implementation Schedule C6-1 6.2 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters C6-2 6.3 Budget Provision for EMP Implementation and Monitoring C6-5 7.1 Emergency Responses C7-10 8.1 The expenditure on Socio-economic Upliftment C8-3

Environment Consultant :

Vimta Labs Limited

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally,

Hyderabad–500 051, www.vimta.com (NABL/ISO 17025 Certified Laboratory, Recognized by MoEF, New Delhi)

April, 2016

Approved Consultant

Project Proponent :

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY FOR

THE PROPOSED TARANHALLI LIMESTONE MINE OF 7.0 MTPA CAPACITY

IN ML AREA OF 631.311 HA AT TARANHALLI AND SHAHABAD

VILLAGES, CHITTAPUR TEHSIL, GULBARGA (KALABURAGI) DISTRICT,

KARNATAKA

Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL)

Bankur Village, Chittapur Tehsil,

Kalaburagi District in Karnataka

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY


Executive Summary

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad E-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Taranhalli limestone mine spread over an area of 631.311 ha is proposed with a production capacity of 7.0 MTPA at Taranhalli and Shahabad villages, Chittapur tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) district, Karnataka by Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL). Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL), formerly Zawar Cement Private Limited (ZCPL), Gulbarga is setting up cement plant of 6.0 MTPA (3.0 MTPA each in phase-I & II) along with 90 MW CPP at Bankur village, Chittapur tehsil, Gulbarga district in Karnataka. MoEF accorded EC vide letter no: J-11011/541/2010-IA.II(I), dated 16th December, 2011 for the cement plant. Taranhalli limestone deposit is a captive mine to fulfil the limestone requirement of proposed cement plant being setup by Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL). The requirement of limestone is about 7.0 MTPA, to manufacture 4.6 MTPA clinker and 6.0 MTPA cement.

1.1 Screening Category

The proposed Taranhalli limestone mine project falls under ‘Category A’ with project or activity type ‘1(a)’, as per Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) notification dated 14th September 2006 which requires preparation of EIA Report to get prior Environmental Clearance (EC) from the Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi.

1.2 Objective Of the Report

The present EIA report has been prepared based on the Terms of Reference (TOR) approved by MoEF, Vide letter no J-11015/399/2015-IA.II(M) dated 8th January, 2016 and based on primary data collected during December 2015 – February 2016 representing winter season.

1.3 Environmental Setting

The study area covers 10 km radius around the proposed mine lease area. The environmental setting of the proposed mining project is as follows: � The proposed limestone mine lease area can be located at Latitude N

17007’27.74”N to N 17010’10.81”N and Longitude E 76053’0.48”E to 76055’27.88”E ;

� The proposed ML area is at a distance of 5.0 km, E from Kagina river, 2.9 km, W from Nandana Halla and 9.0 km, S from Bhima river;

� Site elevation is about 460-400 m above MSL; � There are no Ecological Sensitive locations, archaeological monuments, places of

tourist interests and defence installations within 15 km radius; � There are No forest block exists within 10 km radius. The study area map is shown in Figure-1.


Executive Summary


FIGURE-1

STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)


Executive Summary


2.0 PROCESS DESCRIPTION AND SOURCES OF POLLUTION

2.1 Process Description

The choice of mining method has been considered as opencast mining for quarrying the limestone from the mines. The mining operation will be fully mechanized. The sequence of operation is quarrying, drilling, blasting, loading and transportation. All the rock types occurring within the area are fully exposed. There is only top soil that occurs on the surface and hence removal of the top soil by bull dozers would be required. For limestone, 115 mm size drills will be used for drilling. Shovels with bucket capacities of 6.5 m3 and 4.3 m3 shovels. Transportation of limestone from crusher in ML area to Cement plant will be by covered belt conveyor system.

2.2 Mineral Reserves

The mineral reserves have been estimated for the limestone horizon only. No OB generation. The weighted average quality of limestone horizon found up to mineable depth is suitable for cement making. The salient features of mine are given in Table-1.

TABLE-1

SALIENT FEATURES OF LIMESTONE MINE

Sr. No. Description Details

1 Name of the mine lease Taranhalli Lime Stone Mine 2 Extent of mine lease (ML) area 631.311 ha 3 Elevation MSL Flat with slight undulation 460 M – 400

M mRL 4 Type of ML area Non-forest land and agricultural land 5 Rated capacity of mine 7.00 MTPA limestone production 6 Expected life of mine 50 years

7 Method of mining Open cast mechanized mining by shovel dumper combination

8 Total reserves and resources 436.60 MT 9 OB generation (top soil) during life

of the mine 13.94 million cum

10 OB generation (Top soil) (5 years) 1.128 million cum 11 Over burden thickness (Top soil) 2.35 m (Avg. thickness) 12 Average stripping ratio

(Limestone : OB) (Plan period) 1:0.16

13 Ultimate bottom level (Plan period) 390 mRL 14 Safety zone 7.5 m around ML boundary 15 Working hours 3 shift per day of 7 hrs in 300 days of

operation in a year 16 Maximum bench height 9 m 17 Working bench angle 45º 18 Overall final pit slope 45º 19 Temporary top soil dump 8.50 ha with in ML area


Executive Summary


2.3 Anticipated Life of Mine

Anticipated life of the mine is about 50 years.

2.4 Resources Requirement

• Land Requirement

The total mine lease area for mining of limestone is about 631.311 ha which agricultural land is. However, ML area was Private (Patta land) land and acquisition is under process. No forest land was involved in ML area. • Water Requirement

The water requirement for the mine machinery operations, dust suppression and afforestation shall be 125 m3/day, which shall be met from the existing allocation for plant & mine of 6180 m3/day water from Kagina river and subsequently from water reservoir will be developed in the mine. • Manpower

The manpower requirement will be about 143 nos. including skilled and unskilled workers.

2.3 Sources of Pollution and Control

Virtually, all surface mining methods for any ore/mineral produce some reversible and irreversible impacts which may lead to changes in the landscape due to large-scale excavation. The environmental pollution due to the opencast mining, in general, could be broadly classified into the following categories: • Air Pollution; • Hydrogeological Conditions; • Water Resources and Quality; • Top Soil Preservation and Utilization; • Overburden dump and stacking • Noise Levels and Vibration; • Land Reclamation and Rehabilitation; and • Afforestation Program.

2.3.1 Air Pollution Mining operations contribute towards air pollution in two ways: addition of gaseous pollutants to the atmosphere and the dust particles. The gaseous pollutants include NOx, SO2 and CO. The sources of pollutants from the mining activity include: • Operation of Heavy Earth Moving Machinery (HEMM) which mostly run on

diesel; • Loading /unloading Operations;


Executive Summary


• Transportation of ore/overburden in dumpers; and • Ripping, drilling, blasting and crushing operations. The above points can be classified as follows:

2.3.1.1 Point Source/Single Source

These are stationary sources, which emit air pollutants into the atmosphere from a certain fixed point. In the proposed mine, the following sources or activities form the point sources, which emit Particulate Matter (PM).

• Drilling; • Blasting; • Loading and Unloading; and • Crushing.

Sources of pollution from the captive mines that are associated with various activities are summarized in Table-2.

TABLE-2

SOURCES OF POLLUTION FROM MINING ACTIVITY

Sr.

No. Activities / Operations

Type of

source

Type of

Pollutant

1 Top soil / OB/ Ore removal & unloading Point/ single PM

2 Drilling Point/ single PM 3 Blasting Instantaneous PM 4 OB/ Ore handling at the mine phase and

Loading dumper by excavator/shovel Area/ multiple PM

5 Transportation of OB/ Ore on haul roads Line PM, CO, NOX 6 Crushing the lime stone Point PM 7 Transfer of crushed limestone from crusher

to plant by conveyor belt Line /multiple

volume PM

2.3.2 Topsoil Preservation and Utilization

The limestone in the area is either outcropping or concealed beneath the soil cover varying from 1 to 4 m with average thickness of 2.35 m. The quantity of 1.128 million cum of soil has been estimated to handle during plan period. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety covering an area of 5.0 ha and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease covering and area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the preserved top soil will be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as per requirement.

2.3.3 Solid Waste Generation There is no waste handling during the plan period expect top soil. No surface dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste generation.


Executive Summary


2.3.4 Noise Levels and Vibration

The mining activity uses heavy earth moving equipment. The noise levels of the major operations/equipment such as drilling, blasting, excavators, dumpers, ore transportation etc will be in the range between 85 - 115 dB(A). Blasting in mines may lead to ground vibration, fly rock, noise, dust.

2.3.5 Land Reclamation The area will be progressively reclaimed and rehabilitated as and when areas are devoid of lime stone come into being. After the exhaustion of limestone within the area during life of mine. The reclamation of mined out area will be undertaken by means of water reservoir and greenbelt development on backfilled area.

3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

Primary baseline environmental monitoring studies were conducted during December 2015 – February 2016 representing winter season. The details are as follows:

3.1 Soil Characterization

It has been observed that the pH of the soil in the study area ranged from 7.89 – 8.73. The electrical conductivity was observed to be in the range of 113.1 µS/cm to 569.0 µS. The nitrogen values range between 43.6 – 102.9 kg/ha. The phosphorus values range between 3.3 – 33.7 kg/ha. The potassium values range between 326.1 – 898.4 kg/ha.

3.2 Meteorological Data Generated at Site

The meteorological parameters were recorded on hourly basis during the study period near proposed plant site and comprises of parameters like wind speed, wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover. • Temperature Min: 18.1oC and Max: 33.6oC • Relative Humidity Min: 26% and Max: 58% • Predominant Wind Direction E, NE

3.3 Air Quality

The study area represents mostly rural/residential environment. Eight ambient air quality monitoring stations were selected in and around mine lease area and studies were carried for PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOx. The concentrations of air quality parameters are given in Table-3.


Executive Summary


TABLE-3

AIR QUALITY RESULTS

Sr.No Parameter Range (µµµµg/m3)

1 PM2.5 15.5-32.5 2 PM10 18.9-45.3 3 SO2 8.2-13.7 4 NOx 9.2-16.2

Ambient air quality analysis reveals that these results are well within limits in all locations as per National Ambient Air Quality standards.

3.4 Water Quality

Eight groundwater sources and two surface water samples were collected and analyzed for various parameters to compare with the standards. • Ground Water

The ground water analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.0 to 7.9 which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 160 to 580 mg/l. The concentration of Nitrate fluctuates between 1.6 to 236.5 mg/l. • Surface Water ‘

Surface water analysis results indicate that the pH of the surface water samples collected ranges in between 7.67 to 7.88. The conductivity recorded in between 563 to 572 µs/cm in the sample. Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 is 165 mg/l. The concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 1.0 to 1.5 mg/l.

3.5 Noise Level Survey

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at eight locations in the study area. Noise monitoring results reveal ambient noise levels in all locations are well within the limits as per Ambient Noise standards.

3.6 Flora and Fauna Studies

A preliminary survey was made for determination of baseline details of flora and fauna. Field survey conducted in winter season revealed a total of 44 species of plants. In the study area, the vegetation is dominated by phanerophytes and therophytes followed by hemi-cryptophytes, hydrophytes and geophytes. There are no endangered plants and animals found in the study area, expect the presence of Scheduled III and IV, animals which are listed in the Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. Also as cited there are no endangered or rare or threatened plants found in the study area.


Executive Summary


4.0 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

The environmental impacts due to the proposed mining project, associated activities like ore crushing have been assessed and adequate management plan has been developed to mitigate the impacts.

4.1 Topography

The applied area is a relatively flat ground with slight undulation and very gentle slope towards East to South East. The surface elevation within the applied area varies from 460 m above MSL towards North-West to 400 m MSL towards South-East.

4.2 Air Quality

Ore loading activities, waste dumping and vehicular movement are the sources to air pollution on the surface. Major activities like drilling, blasting and crushing are sources to air pollution. The trucks plying on the haul roads within the ML area will contribute mainly to dust generation and it is anticipated that marginal increase will occur in the PM level at the mine site. Mining of limestone will be for supplying to Captive Cement plant by closed conveyor belt system. The air quality predictions have been carried out by using the mathematical simulation model - AERMOD model developed for estimation of fugitive dust due to mining operations. The resultant concentrations are within the permissible limits.

4.3 Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations

With the mining operations, due to machinery, drilling and blasting for mine development, excavation, transportation and crushing of lime stone, it is imperative that noise levels would increase. However, the expected noise levels will not have significant effect on the outside community as habitation area is far away. The blasting operations are proposed to use deep hole drilling and blasting using delay detonators which are bound to reduce the ground vibrations. Further, the ground vibrations will be controlled by using modern shock tubes with delay non-electric (nonel) detonators. In addition various mitigation measures as given EMP will be practiced at the mine site. Hence, ground vibrations will be well within the specified maximum limits.

4.4 Water Resources

Water required to cater the need for drinking purpose, dust suppression at faces and on haul roads, cleaning and washing of HEME, crushing plant and plantation etc. The requirement of water for mining is about 125 m3/day. The source of water supply will be from existing allocation of 6180 m3/day water from Kagina


Executive Summary


river and water reservoir developed in the ML area. The mine water will be used for spray on haul roads, plantation, cleaning and washing of machineries and toilets etc. No waste water will be generated after water spraying at faces and along haul roads, for dust suppression. The water gets absorbed by the ground, percolates through porous strata or run down, or gets evaporated. Only the limited quantity of water will be used under high pressure for washing and cleaning of HEME in the work shop/garage. The oil & grease traps will be provided to arrest any petroleum products. This water will be used for plantation, therefore, no recycling of water required in the mines.

Considering the availability of surface water in the area vis-à-vis the consumption, the impact of withdrawal of surface water for various uses mentioned above will be insignificant.

Adequate drainage systems will be planned in the mining, service centre for allowing the water to flow in the pre determined path. The drainage system will be designed in such a way even to meet excess rainfall. No water will be allowed to flow across the waste dumps. However, few check dams will be constructed to arrest wash out from the waste dumps during rainy season. All along the mine roads drainage will be provided and benches will be properly sloped so as to avoid stagnation of water.

4.5 Soil Environment

The environmental impacts of the mining activities on topsoil are based on the quantity of removal of topsoil and its dumping. In the present project, as it is proposed to temporarily store the topsoil and used for plantation schemes, no impact of dozing of topsoil is envisaged. No waste rock generation will be involved.

4.6 Solid Waste

There is no waste handling during the plan period expect top soil. No surface dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste generation. Hence, no significant impacts are envisaged due to the generation and disposal of solid waste (over burden).

4.7 Flora and Fauna

As per forest records there is no wild life sanctuary in 15 km radius. There no wildlife corridors in 10 km radius area. As the mining activity is restricted to core zone, no significant impact on the flora of the buffer zone due to the proposed mining is anticipated. With afforestation and development of greenbelt around the mine, the aesthetics will be improved. Extensive plantation comprising of pollutant resistant trees will be carried out surrounding the mine site, which will serve not only as pollution sink but also as a noise barrier. It is expected that with the adoption of these mitigatory measures,


Executive Summary


the impact due to operation of the mine will be minimal on the terrestrial ecosystem. The incremental dust generations due to the mining and processing operations, at the boundary of the project site are insignificant and it is also expected that with the adoption of mitigatory measures as suggested in EMP, the impact will be minimal on the terrestrial ecosystem and also surrounding area. The impact on the fauna of the buffer zone due to the mining activity will be marginal. The proposed progressive plantation over a period of time will reduce the impact, if any, on the fauna.

4.8 Socio-Economic Aspects

The project will definitely help for the improvement of the socio-economic status of the society in the region by extending the direct / indirect employment opportunities. The project will also increase the development of ancillary and related small-scale industries in the adjoining areas.

5.0 Mitigation Measures

The measures required to be undertaken to minimise the impact of mining

• Application of Low and Non Waste Technology (LNWT) in the mining process, • Adoption of reuse and recycling technologies to reduce generation of wastes

and optimize the production cost of the mine, and • Progressive land reclamation measures and overburden management along

with the production of lime stone. • The greenbelt shall be developed.

5.1 Environment Management during Operation Phase

5.1.1 Air Pollution Management

The control measures to be adopted for controlling air pollution and dust emissions from the proposed mining activity are summarized below:

• Proper maintenance of the heavy earth moving machinery and vehicles; • Regular water sprinkling shall be carried out to suppress the dust on haul

roads, service roads and mining face by dumpers converted into water sprinklers;

• The haul roads and service roads shall be graded to remove the accumulated loose material;

• Wet drilling shall be practiced. • Drilling machines shall have sharp drill bits for drilling holes; • Blasting should be carried out with optimum charge; • Blasting operations will be carried out as per Circular-no-8 of DGMS rules • Blasting should be avoided during high winds, night time and temperature

inversion periods; • During high winds, excavation operations should be suspended;


Executive Summary


• The dumpers should not be overloaded so as to prevent spillage of the ore on the roads during transportation;

• Good housekeeping shall be practiced at all the development and production benches and at utility service places; and

• Good canopy greenbelt shall be developed around the mining area, which acts as barrier between mining operation and outside mining area.

5.1.2 Noise Pollution Management

The following control measures shall be adopted to keep the ambient noise levels well below the limits: • Blast hole drilling shall be restricted to day time hours only; • Proper and timely maintenance of mining machinery; • Noise levels shall be controlled by using optimum explosive charge per delay

detonators and proper stemming to prevent blow out of holes; • Speed of moving dumpers running in the mine shall be limited to moderate

speed to prevent undue noise as per DGMS circulars enforcing safety standards.

• Provision of user friendly, soft type ear muffs/ear plugs to workers in noise prone zones in the mine.

• The operator’s chamber shall be safely guarded from the noise pollution by preventing it from the noise arising because of the machinery;

• The noise level generated by blasting is only momentary and is about 100-120 dB(A).

• Developing greenbelt on the sides of crushing plant. Apart from above, the following measures shall be taken to protect the workers from exposure to higher noise levels: • Provision of protective devices like ear muffs/ear plugs; • Provision of sound insulated chambers for the workers deployed on machines

producing higher levels of noise like bulldozers, drills and dumpers etc.; and • Reducing the exposure time of workers to the higher noise levels.

5.1.3 Ground Vibration Control Measures

The following measures shall be adopted to contain the Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) due to blasting within the permissible limits. • Proper blast design; • Avoiding excess confinement of charges; • Number of blast holes per delay shall be kept one; • Proper stemming of holes shall always be carried out; • Blasting shall be avoided during foggy whether and when wind velocity is

more than 25 km/hour; • The burden distance should not exceeded 50% of bench height i.e., 5m; • The spacing to burden distance of 5:1 shall be used. • Staggered pattern of blasting shall be adopted;


Executive Summary


• Shorter stemming lengths of less than 2/3rd of burden distance shall be avoided to reduce overloading of holes and also to control fly rock;

• Maximum number of rows shall be restricted to two since increase in number of rows results in more confinement of charges in the last rows;

• Number of delays used per blast shall be more so as to reduce charge weight per delay and creation of shock waves. In addition to this, wherever confinement is more, like the corners of the block being blasted, belly holes, etc. extra delay shall be provided. Each line of blast holes shall also being divided to blast at two or more different timings by using delays.

• A delay of 25 milliseconds shall be adopted, as the strata are medium hard with high frequency of jointing/fracturing.

• Blasting operations shall be carried out only during day time as per mine safety guidelines;

• A safe distance of about 500 m from center of blasting should be maintained; and

• During blasting, other activities in the immediate vicinity shall be temporarily stopped;

5.1.4 Water Pollution Management

The control measures to be adopted for controlling water pollution are as follows • Proper drainage arrangements at mine should be maintained; • Check Dams should be constructed where ever required; • De-silting of following check dams should be done on regular basis; • Degraded land should be stabilized by afforestation to prevent soil erosion; • Buttress wall and contour trench should be made at the toe of waste dumps

and should be properly maintained; and • Contour bunding at the toe of waste dump should be done before onset of

monsoon. The check dam should have the concrete lining with boulders wrapped in chain link mesh. However the feasibility of constructing new check dams should be studied further for the effective surface water pollution control.

5.1.5 Waste Dump Management

There is no waste generation during the plan period. Hence, no surface dumping is proposed, except top soil generation. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 ha and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease covering an area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the preserved top soil shall be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as per requirement. A bund of 7.5 m bottom width, 3 m top width and 3 m height will be formed on safety zone of entire applied lease area and this bund will be stabilized with plantation, which will act as protective measure. In addition safety zone on either sides of village road covering an area of 3.50 ha will be maintained as green belt.


Executive Summary


Backfilling with generated top soil will be carried out on worked-out benches from second five years block period to conceptual period.

5.1.6 Greenbelt Development

The main aim of plantation in and around the mine areas is to stabilize the land to protect it from rain and wind erosion. As the leftover working area shall contain broken material and fine particles, stabilization against wind erosion is also a must. The plantation scheme broadly covers the following areas:

∗ Plantation around peripheral portions of mine and other built up structures; ∗ Afforestation of barren areas in the lease hold; ∗ Gardens, parks and haul road plantation; ∗ Plantation by way of reclamation /rehabilitation of mined out blocks;and ∗ Improving the conditions of catchment areas and to prevent erosion. The calculated life of the mine based on available reserves and the proposed production plan is more than 50 years. The reclamation and rehabilitation in phased manner along with details of afforestation are given in Table-4.

TABLE-4

PLANTATION SCHEDULE

Period (Year)

Bund Formation on Safety Zone (m)

Proposed plantation Year

Location

Area (ha) No of Plants

1 1500 1.00 1000 Bund on safety zone 2 5170 1.00 1000

3 - 1.00 1000 4 - 1.00 1000 5 - 1.00 1000

Total 6670 5.00 5000

Source: Mine Plan

All protection measures like provision of garland drain, afforestation and stabilization will be taken care on year to year basis as per the requirement. A final mine closure plan incorporating time schedule for abandonment shall be submitted before one year of its closure as per rule. The following steps will be taken for post plantation care:

•••• Activation of feeding roots by loosening the soil regularly; •••• Incorporation of litter in the soil as manure for healthy growth of the plant; •••• Improving aeration & water infiltration; •••• Clearing of weeds; •••• Supporting of saplings; •••• Formation of soil mulch; •••• Protection from browsing animals & trespassers by providing fencing; •••• Fertilizer application, if necessary; and •••• Regular watering.


Executive Summary


6.0 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT STUDIES

The complete mining operation will be carried out under the management control and direction of a qualified mine manager to manage a metalliferous mine granted by the DGMS, Dhanbad. The DGMS have been regularly issuing standing orders, model standing orders and circulars to be followed by the mine management in case of disaster, if any. Moreover, mining staff will be sent to refresher courses from time to time to keep them alert. However, following natural/industrial hazards may occur during normal operation.

• Accident due to explosives; • Accident due to heavy mining equipment; and • Sabotage in case of magazine.

7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

Regular environmental monitoring studies will be conducted in and around lime stone mine lease as per stipulated guidelines by State Pollution Control Board norms and Central pollution Control Board, New Delhi and as per conditions stipulated in environmental clearance.

8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

The proposed lime stone mine will result in improvement in the social infrastructure in following manner:

• Generation of employment and improved standard of living; • Establishment of small and medium scale engineering ancillaries, • Revenue to government; • Change in the socio-economic scenario of the area; • Direct and in direct employment during mine development and mine operation

phases. Recruitment for the unskilled and semiskilled workers for the proposed project will be from the nearby villages;

• Development of the basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, drinking water, proper sanitation, educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment; and

• Overall project will change living standards of the people and improve the socio-economic conditions of the area. Rs.150 crores is allotted for CSR activities by JCCL and will be spent on CSR activities during construction phase of cement plant and 5 years during the operation phase of the plant. Out of Rs. 150 Crores, Rs. 40 Lakhs is allocated under proposed mine project. The expenditure includes the infrastructure developments and recurring cost of various activities An amount of Rs. 111.252 lacs has been incurred so far for the community welfare activities. Existing CSR activities will be strengthened further under proposed project.


Chapter-1 Introduction

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Taranhalli limestone mine spread over an area of 631.311 ha is proposed with a

production capacity of 7.0 MTPA at Taranhalli and Shahabad villages, Chittapur

tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) district, Karnataka by Jaypee Cement Corporation

Limited (JCCL).

Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL), formerly Zawar Cement Private

Limited (ZCPL), Gulbarga is setting up cement plant of 6.0 MTPA (3.0 MTPA each

in phase-I & II) along with 90 MW CPP at Bankur village, Chittapur tehsil,

Gulbarga district in Karnataka. MoEF accorded EC vide letter no: J-

11011/541/2010-IA.II(I), dated 16th December, 2011 for the cement plant.

Taranhalli limestone deposit is a captive mine to fulfil the limestone requirement

of proposed cement plant being setup by Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited

(JCCL). The requirement of limestone is about 7.0 MTPA, to manufacture 4.6

MTPA clinker and 6.0 MTPA cement.

This chapter describes the purpose of the report, identification of project and

proponent, brief description of nature, size, location of the project and importance

to the region and country. The chapter also describes the scope of the study,

details of regulatory scoping carried out as per Terms of Reference (TOR) issued

by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi.

1.1 Purpose of the Report

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated

14th September 2006, subsequent circular dated 6th February 2007 of Ministry of

Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi, the proposed

project falls under ‘Category A Project’ under activity type ‘1(a)’ as the total

area is ≥ 50 ha. This EIA report addresses the environmental impacts of the

proposed project and proposes the mitigation measures for the same.

JCCL had presented the project details to MoEF&CC Expert Appraisal Committee

during its meeting held during 21st -22nd December 2015, to seek the Terms of

Reference (TOR) for the preparation of EIA report. During the meeting, Expert

Appraisal Committee for mining projects has deliberated in detail regarding the

proposed location and also defined the TOR. Subsequently, issued letter No J-

11015/399/2015-IA.II(M) dated 8th January, 2016 mentioning the discussed

ToRs. EIA/EMP has been prepared as per the approved ToR in line with the above

letter and will be made available to public for comments and concerns. A copy of

TOR and its compliance are given in Annexure-I.

Based on the TOR conditions stipulated by MoEF&CC vide letter mentioned above

EIA/EMP has been prepared for conducting Environmental Public Hearing for

proposed 7.0 MTPA limestone mine which was conducted on 09.08.2016 by state

KSPCB. The details are provided in Chapter-7.

The EIA report is prepared for obtaining Environmental Clearance (EC) from

MoEF&CC, New Delhi for the proposed project. The report covers the primary data

collected during 1st December 2015 to 29th February 2016 representing winter

season.




1.2 Identification of the Project Proponent

M/s. Jaypee Cement Corporation Ltd (JCCL) is a public limited company under

“Jaypee Group which is one of the leading infrastructure conglomerates of India

with impressive combined turnover, it actually participates in nation building

through core activities of engineering & construction, cement, power, hospitality,

expressways etc. The company has nation-wide business presence with strength

of 40,000 efficient & committed works forces.

The cement division of the group operated modern computerized process

controlled integrated cement plants & grinding units located in the states of

Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Chhattisgarh,

Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka etc. The company has achieved its peak aggregate

production capacity of 30.30 MTPA.

Under the ambit of national rejuvenation recently taken up by the government of

India, it is proposed to construct 100 smart cities, a network of new cement

topped highways, flyovers, affordable houses for all Indians upto 2022 and huge

number of infrastructure projects. Therefore, heavy and long lasting demand for

cement is visualized for rejuvenation of future.

1.3 Project Background

M/S Jaypee Cements Corporation Ltd (JCCL) is a public limited company under

‘Jaypee Group’, which is a well-diversified industrial conglomerate in India. Four

decades later, with growth and diversification, the group is engaged in the

business of cement, engineering & construction, private hydro power,

development of expressways, highways and hospitality.

On 28.11.2006 M/s. Zawar Cement Pvt. Ltd., (M/s. ZCPL), now M/s. Jaypee

Cement Corporation Ltd (M/s. JCCL) acquired the cement plant unit and captive

mine from M/s. H.M.P Cements Ltd., through an auction held by the Debt

Recovery Tribunal (DRT) court, Kolkata with an intention to revive, restart and

modernize the sick unit, where by all assets and quantified liabilities belonging to

Shahabad unit, where by all assets and quantified liabilities belonging to

Shahabad unit stand transferred in favour of M/s. ZCPL. The debt recovery

Tribunal has directed all the concerned authorities to facilitate the reopening of

the cement factory and to register M/s. ZCPL as the “User Lessee” in respect of

the said mines bearing No.ML.2092 and if any mines contagious to the said

cement factory and also ensure and maintain the constant supply line necessary

for the production of cement, the same is mentioned in the proceedings dated

18.04.2007 of the Director, Department of Mines & Geology, Bangalore.

M/s. ZCPL has requested the Director, Department of Mines & Geology,

Bangalore, vide letter dated 11.01.2007 for grant of mining lease over an area of

635.761 ha at Shahabad & Taranhalli villages, which is in close proximity to the

cement plant unit which was applied for mining lease earlier by M/s. H.M.P

Cements Ltd.

Accordingly, after processing the mining lease application, submitted by M/s.

H.M.P cements Ltd, the Department of Mines and Geology, Government of




Karnataka has directed M/S. ZCPL to submit the Mining Plan for an extent of

631.311 ha approved by Indian Bureau of Mines, Environmental Clearance from

the MoEF&CC and clearance from Karnataka State Pollution Control Board

(KSPCB) vide Letter of Intent (LoI) dated 08.08.2008, for further processing the

mining lease application. Copy of LoI along with translated version in English are

Enclosed vide Annexure-II.

In the 22nd SHLCC meeting held on 24-5-2010, Govt. of Karnataka has approved

the proposals of M/S. Zawar Cement Pvt Ltd., to establish a cement plant of 6

MTPA with 70 MW Captive Power Plant with an investment of Rs. 3000 Crores in

the 472.18 acres of existing land at Shahabad vide proceeding dated 02.06.2010.

Government of Karnataka has approved the change of name of the company from

M/s. Zawar Cements Pvt Ltd to M/s. Jaypee Cement Corporation Ltd, without

change of constitution of the company vide C & I department, Government of

Karnataka proceeding dated 09-11-2012.

Certified documents related to change of name of the company has already been

submitted to MoEF&CC vide reference letter no: JCCL/MoEF&CC/ML-

III/Taranhalli/2015 dated 31st December, 2015.

Now, JCCL has proposed to set up an integrated cement plant of 6.0 MTPA (3.0

MTPA each in phase-I & II) and captive power plant of 90 MW. The limestone

requirement of cement plant is about 7.0 MTPA to manufacture 4.60 MTPA clinker

and 6.0 MTPA cement.

1.4 Need for the Project and its Importance to the Country

The cement forms the backbone of the infrastructural development and in a

developing country like India where the focus is on the infrastructural

development as of now the proposed project would help in reducing the shortfall

of the commodity. Limestone which forms the basic raw material of cement

manufacture would thus be required for the proposed cement plant. This will spur

infrastructure growth, generate employment and provide revenue to the

government.

1.4.1 Importance to the Country & Region

India’s GDP growth from 2011-12 onwards is expected to grow at the rate of

more than 8% per annum and to sustain this growth, investment in infrastructure

projects such as roads, dams, ports, industries, airports, housing, etc is critical.

Cement & Steel are the basic ingredient in all such projects. Therefore cement

production and consumption is essential for sustenance of this growth.

The markets of interest for RCC are:

o Gujarat;

o Maharashtra;

o Karnataka;

o Goa; and

o Kerala.




• Demand - Supply Gap

Growth in cement consumption, in most countries, shows a strong correlation

with GDP growth. The future growth rates for different markets in the target

region are given in Table-1.1.

TABLE-1.1

FUTURE GROWTH RATES OF DIFFERENT MARKETS

Market Future CAGR (%)

Gujarat 10.5 %

Maharashtra 9.0 %

Karnataka 13.0 %

Goa 8.0 %

Kerala 8.0 %

Table-1.2 below shows the trend of future demand in different markets of the

target region.

TABLE-1.2

TREND OF FUTURE DEMANDS OF THE TARGET REGION

Figures in million tonnes

Year Gujarat Maharashtra Karnataka Goa Kerala Total

2011-2012 15.8 19.5 12.1 0.6 9.0 57.0

2012-2013 17.4 21.2 13.3 0.6 9.7 62.2

2013-2014 19.3 23.1 14.7 0.7 10.5 68.3

2014-2015 21.3 25.2 16.1 0.7 11.3 74.6

2015-2016 23.5 27.5 17.7 0.8 12.2 81.7 Source: Extrapolated estimate based on CMA 2010

• Export Possibilities

The entire limestone will be consumed by proposed cement plant. As such, there

is no possibility of any export.

1.5 Project Details

1.5.1 Nature of the Project

The proposed Taranhalli limestone mine is captive source of raw material to meet

the limestone requirement of JCCL.

1.5.2 Size of the Project

The mining project is proposed with a production capacity of 7.0 MTPA in a ML

area of 631.311 ha. The life of mine at the proposed production rate is up to 62

years. However, the life of the mine is calculated for a period of 50 years as per

the mines & minerals (Development & Regulation) Amendment Act, 2015.

1.5.3 Cost of the Project

The estimated cost for the proposed mining project is about Rs. 30 Crores. This

includes the EMP cost of Rs. 35 lakhs.




1.6 Environmental Setting

1.6.1 Study Area

The study area covers 10 km radius from mine lease boundary. Jaypee cement

plant and CPP is located nearly 4.5 km from the ML boundary. At present only

grinding unit and CPP are in operation and there is no clinkerisation unit.

Taranhalli is the nearest village located nearly 1 km, E. Few Shahabad operating

quarries are observed towards eastern side of proposed mine lease area between

purana Shahabad and Taranhalli. ACC wadi cement plant and CPP is the only

industry within 10 km towards SE direction. Study area generally represents rural

environment.

1.6.2 Environmental Sensitivity

The environmental setting within 10 km of the project site is given in Table-1.3.

The index map is shown in Figure-1.1. Topo sheet representing location map of

1:50,000 scale covering land use/ land cover, reserve forests, wildlife

sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserves etc (if any) within 10 km of the project

site is shown in Figure-1.2. Google image is given in Figure-1.3 and proposed

mine lease area photographs are shown in Figure-1.4.

TABLE-1.3

DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING (10 KM RADIUS)

Sr. No. Particulars Details

1 Location

a Village Taranhalli and Shahabad

b Tehsil Chittapur

c District Gulbarga (Kalaburagi)

d State Karnataka

e Geographical co-ordinates Sr.No Latitude Longitude

1 17007’27.74”N 76053’00.48”E

2 17010’10.81”N 76055’27.88”E

2 Elevation (MSL) Generally plain 460 M – 400 M mRL

3 Land use at the project site Agricultural land

4 Nearest highway NH – 218 (10.0 km, W) SH-125 (0.2 km, S) and SH-149 (0.6 km, E)

5 Nearest railhead /

Railway station

Shahabad-2.5 km, SE

6 Nearest airport Hyderabad-240 km, E

7 Defence installations Nil

8 Archaeological important places Nil 9 Ecological Sensitive Areas

(National Parks, Wildlife

sanctuaries)

No notified protected areas as per Wildlife Protection Act 1972 within 10 km radius

No sensitive areas such as wetlands, coastal zone, biospheres existing within 15 km radius

10 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km radius

Nil within 10 km radius

11 Industries in 10 km radius Nil within 10 km radius

12 Nearest major city Gulburaga-20.0 km, NW

13 Nearest major settlement Shahabad-2.5 km, SE

14 Nearest river Kagina river- 5.0 km, E Nandana halla-2.9 Km,W




Sr. No. Particulars Details

Bhima river-9.0 km, S

15 R & R issues Acquisition of land under process (about 58% of land is already registered)

16 Seismic zone Zone-II as per IS-1893 (Part-I): 2002

1.7 Scope of the Study

Based on the TOR, the Environmental Impact Assessment report is prepared

covering study area of 10 km radial area around the mine site. The scope of

study broadly includes:

• To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;

• To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline

environmental status of the study area;

• To identify the ambient air quality levels in the proposed project area;

• To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the

proposed project activities;

• To evaluate the predicted impacts on various environmental attributes in the

study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted

environmental impact assessment methodologies;

• To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures

for improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansions for

environmentally sustainable development; and

• To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.

The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various

publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other

sources.

1.8 Methodology of the Study

Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad along with the officials of JCCL had conducted a

reconnaissance survey and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

• Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by India

Meteorological Department (IMD), Gulbarga;

• Existing topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and

rivers;

• Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;

• Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution

pockets in the area;

• Areas which represent baseline conditions; and

• Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental

attributes.

Field studies have been conducted for a period of three months (December 2015

to February 2016) representing winter season to determine existing conditions of

various environmental attributes as outlined in Table-1.4. The applicable

environmental standards for the project are given in Annexure-III and

administrative legislation in Annexure-IV.




FIGURE-1.1

INDEX MAP

(KALABURAGI) KARNATAKA

Limestone Mine Site




FIGURE-1.2

STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)




TABLE-1.4

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Sr. No.

Environmental Component

Sampling Locations

Sampling Parameters Total Sampling Period

Sampling Frequency

Detection Limit Methodology

1 Meteorology One central location

Temperature, Wind Speed, Wind Direction

3 months Hourly WS: +/-0.02 m/sec

WD: +/- 3 degrees Temp: +/- 0.2 oC

The meteorology parameters were recorded using automatic micro-meteorological

equipment consisting of Anemometer, Wind wane and thermometer. Review of secondary data collected from IMD station at Gulbarga

Rainfall 3 months Daily Rainfall: 0.2 mm Rainfall was recorded every morning at 0830 hours

Relative Humidity, Cloud Cover

3 months Hourly RH: +/- 3% Humidity recorded using wet and dry thermometer and psycometric charts on hourly basis.

2 Ambient Air

Quality

8 locations As per NAAQS 2009 Two days per

week for 13

weeks

24 hourly PM10: 5 µg/m3

PM2.5: 5 µg/m3

CO: 12.5 µg/m3 SO2: 4 µg/m

3

NOx: 4 µg/m3

Gravimetric method for PM10 and PM2.5.

Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2 (IS-

5182 part-II 1969) using Tetrachloro mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution. Jacob-

Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for NOX using Sodium Arsenate absorbing solution of 0.01 N absorbing solution. CO was measured by GC method.

3 Water Quality 10

locations

(8 Surface water

2 Ground water)

As per IS:10500-2012 Grab

sampling

Once in

study period

EC:+/-0.1 us/cm

TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l O&G: 0.1 mg/l DO: 0.5 mg/l

BOD: 2 mg/l COD: 0.5 mg/l Ca, Mg, Na, K:

0.1 mg/l Alkalinity, PO4, SO4, Cl, NO3: 0.1 mg/l

Coliform: 1 MPN

As per APHA methods. The conductivity,

temperature were analyzed at site laboratory and rest of the parameters were analyzed at VIMTA's Central Laboratory at Hyderabad.




Sr.

No.

Environmental

Component

Sampling

Locations

Sampling Parameters Total

Sampling Period

Sampling

Frequency

Detection Limit Methodology

Heavy metals (As, Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr-6, Total Cr, Cu, Zn, Se, Fe)

Grab sampling

Once in study period

0.001 mg/l

4 Noise 8 locations Leq Hourly

readings for 24 hours

Once in

study period

SPL: 0.1 dB(A) Integrated on hourly basis

5 Soil 8 locations Soil profile, Chemical constituents, Suitability

for agricultural growth

Composite sample up to

100- m depth

Once during

study period

EC: ± 0.1 µs/cm N, P, K: 0.1

mg/kg

Analysis was carried out as per Soil Chemical analysis by ML Jackson

6 Terrestrial Ecology

Total study area

Flora and fauna Field observations

Once in study period

- Through field visits and collected secondary data. Count and quadrate method

7 Demography and

Socio-economic aspects

Total study

area

Demographic profile - - - Through field visits and secondary

information sources like National Informatic Center, Delhi and Census operation division

8 Land Use Total study area

Trend of land use change for different

categories

- - - Through field visits and secondary information of IRS, LISS P6 satellite imagery

data sources like National Informatic Center, Delhi

9 Geology Total study area

Geological history - - - Secondary information sources (Geological survey of India and Central Ground Water Board, Delhi)

10 Hydrogeology

(Surface and ground)

Total study

area

Drainage pattern,

nature of streams, aquifer characteristics, recharge and discharge

areas

- - - Secondary information sources like

(Geological survey of India and Central Ground Water Board)




FIGURE-1.3(A)

GOOGLE IMAGE (10 KM RADIUS)

Mine Lease Boundary

10KM

N




FIGURE-1.3(B)

GOOGLE IMAGE

Mine Lease

Boundary

MINE AREA 3

MINE AREA 1

PLANT SITE

COLONY




FIGURE-1.4

SITE PHOTOGRAPHS


Chapter-2 Project Description and Sources of Pollution


2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SOURCES OF POLLUTION

This chapter addresses the details of the proposed limestone mine in context with

processes and capacities, utilities and services, infra-structural facilities, sources

of pollution and proposed mitigation measures. The chapter describes the salient

features of the proposed limestone mine, machinery and pollution control

equipment and their performance for production capacity.

2.1 Type of the Project

The proposed lime stone mine project is a 100% mechanized opencast mining

project. Conventional mining system with shovel dumper combination of mining

technology will be adopted. The sequences of operations are dozing, drilling,

blasting, loading and transportation of ore.

2.2 Need of the Project

India is developing at a record growth rate of 10% GDP. To meet the requirement

of industrial, infrastructural, residential construction activities, JCCL proposes to

develop limestone mine to meet the raw material requirement of proposed

cement plant at Shahabad.

Taranhalli limestone deposit spread over an area of 631.311 ha is a captive

limestone mine to fulfill the limestone requirement of the cement plant being

setup by Jaypee cement corporation Limited (JCCL).

2.3 Details of Mine Operations

This section deals with the salient features of mining project, exploration details,

evaluation of the deposit, estimation of limestone reserves, proposed method of

mining, machinery, phase wise limestone extraction details, details on

infrastructure, various sources of pollution and the measures to control pollution.

2.3.1 Details of Mine Lease Area

The Taranhalli limestone ML area is spread in an area of about 631.311 ha at

Taranhalli and Shahabad villages, Chittapur tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) district,

Karnataka. The mining lease area is located between Latitude N 170 07’ 27.74” to

N 170 10’ 10.81” and Longitude E 760 53’ 00.48” to E 760 55’ 27.88”. The details

of mining lease area and its operation and pollution control measures are given in

following sections. IBM approval is under process. Letter enclosed as Annexure-

V.

2.3.2 Details of Land Use in ML Area

The total area to be acquired for mining of limestone is about 631.311 ha for

which approval has been obtained from Karnataka government. The land use

pattern of mine lease is given in Table-2.1.




TABLE-2.1 (A)

DETAILS OF LAND USE PATTERN IN ML AREA

Sr. No. Land Use Area (in ha) Percentage (%)

1 Forest land Nil 0

2 Waste land Nil 0

3 Grazing land Nil 0

4 Agriculture land 631.311 100

5 Others (specify) Nil 0

Total 631.311 100.00

Source: Mine Plan

TABLE-2.1 (B)

LAND USE PATTERN OF MINE LEASE

Sr.No. Particulars Land use (ha)

Present Plan Period Conceptual

Period

1 Area for mining - 48.00 593.311

2 Topsoil storage - 8.50 -

3 Mineral storage - 7.00 7.000

4 Statutory buildings - 10.00 10.000

5 Area for roads - 01.00 2.500

6 7.5 m safety zone - 15.00 15.000

7 10 m safety zone for

village roads

- 3.50 3.500

8 Area for future use/others 631.311 538.311 -

Total 631.311 631.311 631.311

Source: Mine Plan

2.3.3 Salient Features of Limestone Mine

Mine development and extraction of limestone at the desired capacity will

commence after getting Environmental Clearance from MoEF&CC. Consent to

establish and consent to operate from KSPCB. The salient features of the mine

lease area are presented in Table-2.2.

TABLE-2.2

SALIENT FEATURES OF LIMESTONE MINE


1 Name of the mine lease Taranhalli Lime Stone Mine

2 Extent of mine lease (ML) area 631.311 ha 3 Elevation MSL Flat with slight undulation 460 M – 400

M mRL

4 Type of ML area Non-forest land and agricultural land

5 Rated capacity of mine 7.00 MTPA limestone production

6 Expected life of mine 50 years

7 Method of mining Open cast mechanized mining by shovel

dumper combination

8 Total reserves and resources 436.60 MT

9 OB generation (top soil) during life of the mine

13.94 million cum





10 OB generation (Top soil) (5 years) 1.128 million cum

11 Over burden thickness (Top soil) 2.35 m (Avg. thickness)

12 Average stripping ratio (Limestone : OB) (Plan period)

1:0.16

13 Ultimate bottom level (Plan period) 390 mRL 14 Safety zone 7.5 m around ML boundary

15 Working hours 3 shift per day of 7 hrs in 300 days of

operation in a year

16 Maximum bench height 9 m

17 Working bench angle 45º

18 Overall final pit slope 45º

19 Temporary top soil dump 8.50 ha with in ML area

20 Water requirement 125 m3/day

21 Source of water From existing allocation of 6180 m3/day

water from Kagina river (for plant &

mine)

22 Power requirement 150 MW

23 Source of power KSEB & CPP

24 Manpower requirement 143 nos. Source: Mine Plan

2.3.4 Mine Layout

The main design considerations in the quarry layout are given below:

• To design an economical production of required limestone quality for the life of mine;

• To minimize transportation distance for limestone and overburden; and • To minimize adverse effects on environment.

2.3.5 Topography and Drainage

The applied area is a relatively flat ground with slight undulation and very gentle

slope towards East to South East. The surface elevation within the applied area

varies from 460 m above MSL towards North-West to 400 m MSL towards South-

East.

The area is drained by number of easterly flowing seasonal streams, some of

which join a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad Town and finally

reaches Kagina River.

The surface plan showing all the surface features of ML area has been prepared

and is shown in Figure-2.1.

2.4 General Geology

The geological set up of the region is part of Bhima Basin known for the

occurrence of cement grade limestone which has attracted several entrepreneurs

to set up major cement plants. The Bhima series of rocks are equivalent to

Kurnool system. The lower Bhimas are comprised of sandstones and shale. The

middle Bhimas are mainly limestone. The main rock formations are found in the

upper Bhimas. The limestone deposits comprise of purple and grey limestone.




Siliceous limestone also occurs in association with grey limestone, which can be

used as blend along with grey limestone.

2.4.1 Local Geology

The geology and stratigraphic sequence met within the applied lease area is

detailed below:

• Soil; • Gray limestone; • Siliceous limestone; • Shaly limestone; and • Purple shale.

Black Cotton Soil (BCS) occurs as top layer/cap in the area. The thickness of

black cotton soil varies from 1.00 to 4.00 m.

2.4.2 Limestone

There are three types of limestone viz., Siliceous, Grey and Shaly limestone.

Siliceous limestone can be used as the blending material. Gray limestone is the

main pay zone in the deposit. Shaly limestone forms the transition zone and

found underlying limestone and overlying shale. The general strike of the

limestone beds in the area is N5°W - S5° E with dips 2 to 4° westerly. The

geological plan sections are shown in Figure-2.2 & Figure-2.3.

2.4.3 Structure

As stated above, black cotton soil has obliterated the local structural features.

Within the ML area the black cotton soil occurs as a cap rock throughout the lease

area. The thickness of the black cotton soil cap varies from 1.0 to 4.0 m. The

general strike of limestone bed is N5°W-S5°E and the dip is around 2o-4o

westerly. This has been exposed by the workings. The grade of the gray

limestone is 35%-49.97% CaO. Based on the geological data, the zone of

limestone mineralization has been delineated upto a depth of 55 m, bench height

9 m. The recovery of limestone is considered as 100% except where caves occur.

The bulk density considered is 2.5 t/cum.




FIGURE-2.1

SURFACE PLAN OF ML




FIGURE-2.2

GEOLOGICAL PLAN OF ML




FIGURE-2.3

GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS




2.5 Details of Exploration

The Taranhalli limestone deposit was explored by M/s. Associated Cement

Companies Limited (M/s. ACC) in 1984 for Shahabad Cement Works. 31 core

boreholes for a meterage of 1157.50 m and 36 DTH bore holes for a meterage of

756.50 m were drilled.

2.5.1 Future Programme of Exploration

The mineral existence has been established through earlier exploration inputs of

core/DTH drilling by M/s. ACC. Some areas are still under resources category as

per the present day norms and to delineate the structural aspects, part of the

applied area requires exploration with few boreholes. Accordingly the exploration

has been proposed upto maximum depth of limestone formation observed from

the drilled bore holes. 30 boreholes are proposed upto a depth of 50 m to

establish the host rock contact. However, the proposed depth may vary according

to site requirement as per the progress of drilling and its outcome.

2.5.2 Limestone Reserve Estimation

Mineral Resources are estimated based on the level of exploration by considering

new threshold value prescribed by IBM i.e. 35% CaO for Limestone. The mineral

resource estimation is given in Table-2.3.

TABLE-2.3

MINERAL RESOURCE ESTIMATION

Level of

Exploration Gray

Limestone Reserves/Resources

(tonnes)

Grade %

Range CaO

Siliceous Limestone Reserves/ Resources

(tonnes)

Grade %

Range CaO

Shaly Limestone Reserves/Resources

(tonnes)

Grade % Range CaO

G1-Detailed Exploration

2,97,86,500 47.42% to

49.97%

8,61,000 39.97% to

41.48%

62,99,920 39.57% to 41.02%

G2-General Exploration

4,31,51,800 1,08,62,000 69,71,910

G3–Prospecting 15,21,04,000 4,82,70,375 1,71,99,49

0

G4-Reconnaissance 8,71,50,088 2,44,06,588 96,22,437

Source: Mine Plan

2.5.3 Reserves and Resources as per UNFC

The category-wise reserves/resources as on 01.03.2016 are given in Table-2.4.




TABLE-2.4

CATEGORY-WISE RESERVES/RESOURCES AS ON 01.03.2016

Classification UNFC

Code

Gray

Limestone (Tonnes)

Siliceous

Limestone (Tonnes)

Shaly

Limestone (Tonnes)

Grade %

Range CaO

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

A. Mineral Reserves

1) Proved Mineral Reserves

111 2,97,86,500 8,61,000 62,99,920 Gray: 47.42 to 49.97%

Siliceous:39.97 to 41.48% Shale :39.57 to 41.02%

2) Probable Mineral

Reserves

122 4,03,19,075 1,05,36,325 63,77,932

Total Mineral

Reserves

7,01,05,575 1,13,97,325 1,26,77,852

B. Remaining Resources

3) Feasibility Mineral Resources

211 -- -- --

4) Pre-feasibility Mineral

Resources

221 222

-- 28,32,725

-- 3,25,675

-- 5,93,978

5) Measured Mineral Resources

331 -- -- --

6) Indicated Mineral Resources

332 -- -- --

7) Inferred Mineral

Resources

333 15,21,04,000 4,82,70,375 1,71,99,490

8) Reconnaissance Mineral Resources

334 8,71,50,088 2,44,06,588 96,22,437

Total Resources 24,20,86,813 7,30,02,683 2,74,15,905

Total (A+B) 31,21,92,388 8,43,99,963 4,00,93,757

Source: Mine Plan

2.5.4 Anticipated Life of Mine

Considering the estimated Gray, Siliceous & Shale limestone reserves and

resources of 454.67 million tonnes at the rate of proposed maximum production

during the plan period i.e., 7.00 million tonnes, the life of the mine has been

calculated as under:-

Total reserves and resources = 436.60 million tonnes

Proposed production during the = 7.00 mtpa.

plan period

Total life of the mine: 436.60/7 = 62.37 Say 62 years.

However the life of the mine is calculated for a period of 50 years as per the

Mines & Minerals (Development and Regulation) Amendment Act, 2015.

2.5.5 Structure of Deposit

Within the ML area, the black cotton soil occurs as a cap rock throughout the

lease area. The thickness of the black cotton soil cap varies from 1.0 to 4.0 m.

The general strike of limestone bed is N5°W-S5°E and the dip is around 2o-4o

westerly. This has been exposed by the workings. The grade of the gray




limestone is 35%-49.97% CaO. Based on the geological data, the zone of

limestone mineralization has been delineated upto a depth of 55 m, bench height

9 m. The recovery of limestone is considered as 100% except where caves occur.

The bulk density considered is 2.5 t/cum.

2.6 Method of Mining

The choice of mining method has been considered as opencast mining for

quarrying the limestone from the mine. The mining operation will be fully

mechanized. The sequence of operation is quarrying, drilling, blasting, loading

and transportation.

All the rock types occurring within the area are fully exposed. There is only top

soil that occurs on the surface and hence removal of the top soil by bull dozers

would be required. 40T/60T capacity dumper will be used to transport the OB

from the face to dump area.

For limestone, 115 mm size drills will be used for drilling. Crawler mounted

hydraulic excavator with bucket capacity of 6.5 m3 and 4.3 m3 capacity will be

used for loading and transportation to cement plant by closed conveyor belt

system will be used from the mine lease area.

2.6.1 Appropriate Major Techniques

There are four types of equipment systems available for opencast mining:

• Bucket-wheel excavator mining; • Dragline mining; • Shovel-dumper combination; and • Surface miners.

For the proposed limestone mine, conventional mining system with shovel

dumper combination mining technology will be adopted and the reasons for

selection are detailed below:

• The bucket wheel alternative has not been considered because the strata below the upper most weathered mantle is hard, strong and undulating,

requiring blasting;

• Dragline is a high capacity machine, most suitable for thick and flat seams.

• Surface miners have not yet been tried as production equipment for removal of OB. Their deployment in limestone mine will eliminate blasting as well as

need for in pit crushing. They have been very successful where the thickness

of OB is very less.

Keeping in view the overall mine operation, deposit, conventional mining system

with shovel dumper combination has been proposed for OB and limestone

removal.




2.6.2 Sequence of Mining

The fully mechanized opencast method of mining will be adopted. Conventional

mining using drilling, blasting and/ or rock breaking and material handling by

excavator/ dumper combination. The flow sheet indicating the different stages of

mining operations are shown in Figure-2.4.

2.6.3 Year-wise Tentative Excavation in Cubic Meters indicating pit wise Development&

ROM

During the plan period, excavation is proposed at South Eastern side of the

applied lease area advancing from North to South. Topsoil will be handled during

first two years of the plan period and there after limestone production is

proposed. Excavation plan for the plan period is shown on pit layout plans

enclosed in Figure-2.5 to Figure-2.9. The plan shows proposed tentative annual

bench-wise limits of excavation. The bench position at the end of the year is

marked on composite sections showing plan period workings are given in Figure-

2.10. Details of excavation quantities for the plan period is given in Table-2.5.

TABLE-2.5

DETAILS OF EXCAVATION QUANTITIES

Cubic Meters Year Location Total

Tentative Excavation

(Cum)

Top Soil OB/SB/IB ROM (Gray Limestone) ROM/ waste (Top

Soil) Ratio

Cum B.D @ 1.80 t/cum

Tonnes

Cum Ton nes

Cum 100% recovery

B.D

@ 2.5 t/cum Tonnes *

1st South Eastern 329000 329000 5,92,200 -- -- -- -- --

2nd South Eastern 799000 799000 14,38,200 -- -- -- -- --

3rd South Eastern 1600000 -- -- -- -- 16,00,000 40,00,000 --

4th South Eastern 2400000 -- -- -- -- 24,00,000 60,00,000 --

5th South Eastern 2800000 -- -- -- -- 28,00,000 70,00,000 --

Total 79,28,000 11,28,000 20,30,400 -- -- 68,00,000 170,00,000 1:0.16

Source: Mine Plan * Tentative tonnage of the ore by computing approximate bulk density and recovery factor.




FIGURE-2.4

FLOW SHEET INDICATING DIFFERENT STAGES OF MINING OPERATIONS




FIGURE-2.5

I YEAR PRODUCTION PLAN




FIGURE-2.6

II YEAR PRODUCTION PLAN




FIGURE-2.7

III YEAR PRODUCTION PLAN




FIGURE-2.8

IV YEAR PRODUCTION PLAN




FIGURE-2.9

V YEAR PRODUCTION PLAN




FIGURE-2.10

YEAR WISE PRODUCTION SECTIONS




2.7 Extent of Mechanization

Mechanized mining operation will be practiced for production of limestone and

removal of waste and soil. The over burden soil being soft in nature is excavated

and loaded into dumpers for transport and spreading over the backfilled areas.

2.7.1 Details of Mining Equipment

The mine will be fully developed using following machines and the same will be

deployed during the mine operation. The details of mining machinery are given in

Table-2.6.

TABLE-2.6

DETAILS OF MINING MACHINERY

Sr. No. Type of Machinery Capacity HP Nos. Required

1 BVB Drill Machine 4.5" or 115

mm dia

2.5HP 3

2 XAH 210 Compressor 550cfm 180 3

3 PC 1250 Excavator 6.5 m3 650 3

4 PC 600 Excavator 4.3 m3 433 3

5 EX 200 LC Shovel with Rock breaker

1.2 m3 120 1

6 CAT 988 H Loader 6.9 m3 555 1

7 D 155A Dozer 11.8 m3 302 1

8 HD 465 Dumpers 60 tonner 719 6

9 HM1040 40 tonner 320 6

Supportive Equipment

10 Soil Compactor -- -- 1

11 Water Tanker 12 Kl 118 1

12 Mobile servicing Van

Ashok Leyland

4 KL 110 1

13 Explosive Van 6 Ton 70 1

14 Servicing Van - 100 1

15 Portable Lighting Tower - 10 1

16 Welding Gen Set 500 Amps 58 1

Source: Mine Plan

2.7.2 Drilling and Blasting

Generally for the preparation and development of quarry, the first phase of

operation is drilling followed by blasting. Adequate care will be taken while drilling

and blasting considering the safety, statutory and environmental aspects. Blast

holes will be drilled at an angle and the ratio of spacing to burden. Sub grade

drilling will be carried-out to maintain the level of the bench floor, avoiding the

toe.

Angular blast hole drilling is selected for reduced back break and toe problems,

improved fragmentation, better working conditions, and better performance of

loading and hauling units. The staggered pattern of blast holes has been chosen

taking into considering the physical characteristics of the deposit and other allied

parameters, type of explosives, height of the bench etc.




Maximum production per day: 23,400 tonnes in 3 shifts (by considering 7.00

MTPA)

Maximum production per shifts: 23,400/3 = 7,800 tonnes/shift

The amount of drilling required is calculated as under,

Spacing: 5 m

Burden: 3 m

Depth of the hole inclusive of sub-grade drilling: 11 m

Blasting efficiency: 80%

Insitu density of limestone: 2.50 tonnes/m3

The quantity of rock broken for hole of 11 m depth

= 5m x 3m x 11m x 0.80 x 2.5 tonnes/m3 =330 tonnes

Therefore, Rock broken / Mtr. = 330 t /11 = 30 tonnes.

Meterage required per shift 7,800 tonnes/30 = 260 m.

No. of holes required for 7,800 tonnes @ 330 tonnes per hole

= 7,800 /330 = 23.64 holes say 24 holes.

Capacity of Drilling Machine @20mtr/hour for shift of 7 hrs

= 20 X 7 = 140 m.

No. of drilling machines required per shift = 260/140 = 1.86 say 2 Nos.

Two drills with two compressors of 550 cfm are required to meet the production

targets and to meet any contingency of break down one drill with compressor has

been considered as standby.

Broad Blasting Parameters

Limestone in this lease area is massive, compact and sub-horizontal to very low

dipping. The strata exhibit fractures. Hence, there are no problems in blasting. A

burden and spacing of 3 x 5 m is proposed by drilling blast holes of 115 mm dia

with sub grade drilling of 10%. Bench heights are generally 9 m depth. However

there will be minor variations at different locations due to the nature of the

deposit. Blast holes will be normally drilled in rows in the selected block.

Staggered drill holes usually in 3 to 5 rows will be blasted using millisecond delay

detonators (one delay for each hole). Multi- delay firing will be adopted to achieve

best fragmentation and optimum results.

Type of explosive used and powder factor: For charging the blast holes, booster

and ANFO will be used in 20:80 proportions. The expected powder factor in the

mines will be 6 tonnes/kg. On the basis of the powder factor, requirement of

slurry explosives and ANFO per day are of the order of 780 kg of Booster and

3130 kg of ANFO for limestone production of 23,400 tpd.




The details of yield per blast hole and daily requirements are as under

Yield per hole 3 X 5 X 11 X 0.80 X 2.5 = 330 tonnes

Powder Factor considered is 6

Powder factor is arrived at

Burden X Spacing X Bench Height X Density/Charge per hole

3 X 5 X 10 X 2.5/60 = 6

Total Explosives requirement 330 tonnes/6 kg = 55 kg

Slurry Explosives requirement @20% = 11 kg

55 kg

ANFO required @80% = 44 kg

No of Holes required per day 23,400/330 = 70.90 say 71 holes

Slurry Explosives required per day 71 holes x 11 kg = 781 kg say 780 kg

ANFO required per day 71 holes x 44 kg =3,124 kg say 3,130 kg

2.7.3 Type of Explosives

The most modern type of explosives suitable for opencast mines that are

available in India shall be used in the proposed mine.

Primer Charge (Boosters)

• Slurry explosives: Ore boost, Acquadine, Power gel and Indo gel etc.

Column Charge

• Slurry explosives: Energel, Powergel, Indogel etc; and • Ammonium Nitrate Fuel Oil (ANFO) mixture - Field mixed for dry holes and filled in poly bags for watery holes

In addition to the above site mixed slurry may also be used from time to time

depending up on the requirement.

Only 2/3 hole will be charged and 1/3 hole will be filled up with stray material as

steaming to reduce vibration and flying stones.

2.7.4 Storage of Explosives

Explosives, being highly dangerous and hazardous have to be stored in a proper

magazine as a precaution. License to store 5.26 tonnes high explosives magazine

storage has been applied as per the Indian Explosive Act and Rule.




2.7.5 Loading & Transport

The blasted mass is loaded by two to six hydraulic excavators each of 6.5 cum

and 4.3 cum bucket capacity. About 23400 tonnes will be crushed at crusher in

mine and transported to the plant by closed belt conveyor system to cement

plant which is located only 4.5 km away from the mine.

2.8 Mine Drainage

Drainage pattern is dendritic to sub-dendritic in nature. The area is drained by

number of easterly flowing seasonal streams, some of which join a water body

i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad Town and finally reaches Kagina river. These

nallahs do not pose any problem and also, there is no threat of water pollution

during mining operations.

The southwest monsoon sets in the middle of June and extends till the end of

September. Bulk of the annual rainfall occurs during this season, which

constitutes over 75% of the annual rainfall. Significant rainfall occurs during the

winter monsoon owing to northeastern monsoon, which constitutes 15% of the

annual rainfall. Normal Rainfall of the district is 777 mm (1901-70) and actual

rainfall is 881.10 mm (2005). Normal rainy days (as per 1901-70) are 46.

Although, consistent normal rainfall is prevalent, Sedam, Chincholi & Chitapur

taluks experience mild drought conditions.

The applied area is a relatively flat ground with slight undulation and very gentle

slope towards East to South East. The surface elevation within the applied area

varies from 460 m above MSL towards North-West to 400 m towards South-East

from MSL. The area is drained by number of easterly flowing seasonal streams,

some of which join a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad Town and

finally reaches Kagina River.

Total quantity of runoff from the applied lease area:

Quantity of rain water (m3) = Area (Sqm.) X Annual average rain fall (m) –

5% (percolation)

= 631.311 x 10000 x0.777 = 4905286m3–245264 m3 = 4660022 m3

Minimum and maximum depth of water table based on observations from the

nearby wells and water bodies is 30 m (370 MSL) to 45 m (355 MSL) from

general ground level (400 MSL).

During plan period minimum and maximum working levels proposed will be 418

m RL to 390 m RL respectively.

During the plan period workings are proposed upto 390 m RL and from general

observations the ground water level is below 350 m RL. Hence, no ground water

will be encountered during the life of the mine.




2.9 Disposal of Overburden

Top Soil

The lease area has top soil ranging in thickness from 1.0 to 4.0 m and average

thickness is 2.35 m. During the plan period, 1.128 million cum of soil has been

estimated to handle. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation

of bund on 7.5m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 ha and remaining quantity

will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the applied lease covering an area

of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the preserved top soil

shall be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as per requirement. The

details of topsoil, formation of bund & storage of top soil and plantation is given

in Table-2.7.

TABLE-2.7

DETAILS OF TOPSOIL, FORMATION OF BUND & STORAGE

OF TOP SOIL AND PLANTATION

Year Top Soil

Quantity (in

million cum)

Bund on Safety Zone (bottom width 7.5m, top width 3m & height 3m)

Storage of Top Soil Plantation on Bund

Utilization of

Top Soil (million cum)

Proposed

Length of Bund (m)

Top Soil

Quantity (million cum)

Area for

Storage (ha)

Area

(ha)

No. of

Plants

1st 0.329 0.023 1500 0.306 3.15 1.00 1000

2nd 0.799 0.082 5170 0.717 5.35 1.00 1000

3rd - - - - - 1.00 1000

4th - - - - - 1.00 1000

5th - - - - - 1.00 1000

Total 1.128 0.105 6670 1.023 8.50 5.00 5000

Source: Mine Plan

• Waste

There is no waste handling during the plan period expect top soil.

• Mineral Reject

Limestone of grade varying from 39.97% to 49.97% CaO. is available in the area,

which will be suitably blended as per the cement plant requirement. Hence, there

is no mineral rejects generation from this applied area during the plan period.

• Sub-grade

There is no sub grade mineral generation from this mine during the plan period.

As per the present guide lines there is no sub grade. Only mineral rejects, which

is below the cutoff grade and above the threshold limit.

No surface dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste

generation.




2.10 Use of Mineral

The Taranhalli limestone mine is a captive mine of JCCL, and all limestone

produced here will be sent to cement manufacture of JCCL, located in Gulbarga

district of Karnataka state for producing cement.

2.10.1 Mineral Preparation and Dispatch

The blasted mass is loaded by six hydraulic excavator each of 6.5 cum and 4.3

cum bucket capacity JCCL is proposing closed conveyor belt system from mine to

crushing plant, which is located only within the proposed ML area.

2.10.2 Mineral Beneficiation

The limestone from this applied lease area does not require any beneficiation for

quality improvement except crushing and feeding to the plant.

2.11 Conceptual Plan

For a mine, preparation of conceptual mine plan amounts to, fore-seeing in

totality and planning for mining and related activities through-out its life span.

Therefore, preparation of ideal conceptual mine plan for any mine is difficult and

such plan prepared, remains acceptable only under given circumstances. It

cannot be over looked that, any such plan undergoes amendments and revisions

in the course of progressive stages of exploration and exploitation.

Conceptual mine plan is prepared upto end of the mine taking into consideration

the present available reserves, excavation, recovery of ROM, reclamation &

rehabilitation and present guidelines.

Taking into consideration of the available exploration data, structural parameters

of the mineral body and the updated geological mapping, final pit layout is

designed by maintaining 45° pit slope with maximum depth of 55 m on an

average from surface level. Since the nature of mineral occurrence is bedded

type, 7.5 m safety barrier itself is considered as ultimate pit limit. The final pit

limit so defined may remain tentative, as the exploration is on-going process

along with the mining operations. Based on present data & assumptions the

conceptual plan and sections are given in Figure-2.11 and Figure-12.




FIGURE-2.11

CONCEPTUAL PLAN




FIGURE-2.12

CONCEPTUAL SECTIONS




2.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan

The mine plan has been designed for the progressive closure of the mine, such

that after the cessation of mining operations, the rehabilitation measures required

are minimal. During plan period, out of the ML area of 631.311 ha, 93.00 ha shall

be utilized. The progressive mine closure plan was prepared, under which

simultaneous reclamation measures of the land disturbed due to mining and allied

activities are proposed. The abandonment cost estimated during the plan period

is given in Table -2.8.

TABLE-2.8

ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING THE PLAN PERIOD

Sr.

No.

Head Area of land use (in Ha) Considered

as fully

reclaimed and rehabili

-tated(in

Ha.)

Net area

considered for

calculation (In Ha.)

Area put

on use at start of Plan

Period (in ha

Additional

Requirement during Plan Period (in ha)

Total

(in ha)

1 Area under Mining A B C=(A+B) D E=(C-D)

2 Storage for top soil - 48.000 48.000 - 48.000

3 Waste dump site - 8.500 8.500 - 8.500

4 Mineral storage - - - - -

5 Infrastructure-

St. Buildings - 7.000 7.000 - 7.000

6 Roads - 10.000 10.000 - 10.000

7 Railway - 1.000 1.000 - 1.000

8 Tailing pond - - - - -

9 (a) 7.5m safety zone/green belt

- 15.000 15.000 - 15.000

(b) 10m safety

zone for village roads

- 3.500 3.500 - 3.500

10 Effluent treatment

plant - - - - -

11 Mineral separation plant

- - - - -

12 Others (Unused area & area for future

use)

631.311 - - - -

Grand Total 631.311 93.000 93.000 - 93.000

Source: Mine Plan

Area put to use by the end of Plan period will be 93.000 Ha., at specified rate of

Rs. 25,000/- per Ha. the financial assurance is Rs. 23,25,000/-. The financial

assurance in the form of en-cashable bank guarantee for Rs. 23,25,000/-.




During the plan period, excavation is proposed at South Eastern side of the

applied lease area advancing from North to South. Topsoil will be handled during

first two years of the plan period and there after limestone production is

proposed. During the plan period workings are proposed upto 390 m RL and from

general observations the ground water level is below 350 m RL. Hence, no ground

water will be encountered. The roads will be proposed upto the proposed pit and

the gradient of 1 in 16 will be maintained as per MMR 1961. There is no waste

generation from the mine, however, topsoil thickness varying from 1 m to 4 m

(average thickness of 2.35m) is required to be handled for production of

limestone. During the first two years of the plan period 1.128 million cum of

topsoil will be handled. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for

formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 ha and

remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease

covering an area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the

preserved top soil shall be utilized for backfilling on worked-out benches as per

requirement. Financial area assurance plan is given in Figure-2.13.




FIGURE-2.13

FINANCIAL AREA ASSURANCE PLAN




2.13 Resource Requirement

2.13.1 Power Requirement

Power requirement for mining operations includes operation of lime stone

crusher, closed belt conveyor and maintenance of mining machinery. Power

requirement will be met from KSEB (Karnataka State Electricity Board) grid and

CPP of cement plant. In accordance with the statutory requirements, the mine

haul roads, excavation faces, crusher and other working sites will be illuminated.

2.13.3 Water Requirement

The water requirement for the mine machinery operations, dust suppression and

afforestation shall be 125 m3/day, which shall be met from the existing allocation

for plant & mine of 6180 m3/day water from Kagina river and subsequently from

water reservoir will be developed in the mine. Allocation letter from Irrigation

Department is given in Annexure-VI. The break-up of water requirement for

different units in the proposed mine is given in Table-2.9.

TABLE-2.9

WATER REQUIREMENT FOR ML AREA

Sr. No Particulars Quantity (m3/day)

1 Drinking 10

2 Dust suppression 60

3 Mine operation 30

4 Greenbelt development 25

Total 125

Source: Mine Plan

2.13.4 Site Services

• Mine Office

Mines office will be provided at a suitable site having sufficient space to

accommodate mine executives and staff. It will be equipped with telephones and

wireless facilities connected with mine and cement plant.

• Work Shop

A well-equipped workshop adjoining to mines office will be provided. The day to

day repairs and maintenance will be undertaken in this workshop. For major

repairs help will be taken from central workshop facilities. A mobile service van

(Bouser) equipped with compressor, tanks for oil, water, grease etc will also be

provided and maintained at site.

• Water Supply

The drinking water / domestic water requirement will be met from Kagina river

and water will be stored in the overhead tank to facilitate distribution of water

round the clock to the mines office complex and other areas. For water sprinkling




water will be used from water reservoir developed in the mine. The drinking

water will be supplied to the persons working in the mines in suitable containers

and also be kept at the rest shelter, first aid station and other places through

suitable taps.

Two water tankers with sprinkling facilities will also be provided for water

spraying on haul roads and for miscellaneous uses at mine.

• First Aid Room

First aid room of adequate size with required equipment will be established near

the mines office, whereas the first aid station near the mine workings is of mobile

type.

Rest shelter of standard design will be provided near the first aid station. Cool

and wholesome drinking water will be provided at the shelter in suitable container

or through water taps.

• Vocational Training Center

A full fledged vocational training center comprising the facilities listed below will

be operated in mine lease area. The following facilities are provided in vocational

centre.

� Lecture room;

� Discussions hall;

� Model room;

� Library;

� Laboratory;

� Toilet; and

� Adequate training materials like slides, cassettes, maps, charts, flanner

boards etc.

2.13.5 Other Facilities

The following site services will be provided in mine lease area:

• Rest shelter; • Mine office/survey office & Drawing office; • Auto work shop; • Fire fighting station; • Spare stores; and • Telecommunication system.

2.13.6 Employment Potential for ML

The mining establishment presents vast opportunities of employment to various

positions under various cadres, viz., management, supervisory, skilled workmen,

semi-skilled workmen and unskilled workmen besides casual workmen. There will

be 143 persons will be deployed for the proposed ML operation.




2.13.7 Facilities for Labour Force

During mine development phase of the project, work force of about 143 workers

needs to be deployed, which consists of skilled and un-skilled workers. All the

workers will be housed in labour colony, which will be located near the project site.

The colony which will be temporary in nature will have the following amenities:

1 Drinking water facility – Drinking water will be supplied through water tankers/community taps;

2 Community kitchen will be provided for the workers; 3 Sanitation facilities will be constructed which will include the adequate number of separate toilets for men and women. The make shift treatment plant will be

installed and treated wastewater will be utilized in greenbelt development;

4 Bins will be installed to collect municipal waste from the colony; 5 Small play ground and child care centers will be developed in the colony; 6 Fuel (kerosene/LPG) will be supplied to the labours for cooking to prevent tree felling.

2.13.8 Infrastructure

Infrastructure facilities like road transport, post & telephone, banks etc. are

basics for each and every area. The company management has taken various

steps by upliftment of the basic amenities of the area by providing drinking water,

pucca road, communication facilities etc.

2.13.9 Safety Zone around Mining Area

The mining operation in the mine will be carried out in accordance with the

mining plan/ scheme of mining duly approved by the Indian Bureau of Mine.

As per the norms of Regulation 111 of MMR, 1961 about 7.5-m wide barrier is to

be left at the ML boundary. The area will be kept free of human / cattle and the

blasting will be done only after the safety clearance.

No blasting will be undertaken within 500-m radius of any building not belonging

to JCCL unless permission is obtained from DGMS. Detailed ground vibration

studies will be undertaken periodically during mine operation. The area situated

adjacent to ML boundary is barren to agriculture in category. People utilize their

land for cultivation and come temporarily to their field for cultivation. All such

persons will be vacated out of blasting danger zone as stipulated in regulation

164 of MMR, 1961. The blasting operations will be undertaken in the mine under

experienced qualified person. The optimum blast design shall be followed during

blasting operation. Based on ground vibration studies, Ground vibration will be

and projectiles from fly rock shall be kept limited.

With the above precaution no danger is anticipated to the area falling adjacent to

ML area. Therefore, no extra land is required to be purchased in safety radius.

Safety and Security

When the mine is abandoned or is getting exhausted, the following safety and

security measures will be implemented.




• The area will be fenced out; • A parapet wall as per rule will close all access roads to the pit/faces; • Warning will be displayed on the “Notice Board”; • Security personnel will be posted at every danger point; • No unauthorized person will be allowed to enter the mine without prior permission of the management;

• Mine benches will be dressed and properly sloped for its stability; and • Garland drains will be made all around the mine to prevent water flow towards mine for prevention of land slide/ side fall.

Additional safety measures are also proposed at the time of decommissioning

during conceptual stage:

• Masonry wall of 1.5 m high with proper slope (towards access road) and inward (towards the pit) all around the periphery of the pit will be provided;

and

• Plantation of Shrubs/Bushes on the mound;

2.13.10 Transportation of Ore and Overburden

Limestone will be extracted and the same will be supplied to clinker plant. The

overburden in the form of soil from the lease will be transported using 40/60

tonne dumpers to the designated dumping yard and properly stacked within the

ML.

Similarly, the ore (limestone) will be transported to crushing plant by closed

conveyor belt and ultimately sent to clinker plant.

No public road network will be used for the transportation of ore and hence, no

impact on the existing road network is envisaged.

2.13.11 Ultimate Pit Limit

The ultimate pit limit has been decided based upon the exploration carried out.

The entire mineralized area shall be exploited. At places where the extent of

mineralization could be seen upto the ML boundary and beyond, an ultimate pit

limit of 7.5-m shall be left within the lease boundary as per statue.

2.13.12 Ultimate Pit Slope

The mining benches have been so designed that the ultimate pit slope of the

mining benches shall be 45o at the stage of mine abandonment. The width of the

benches before abandonment shall not be maintained less than the height of the

benches.

2.14 Sources of Pollution

Virtually, all surface mining methods for any ore/mineral produce some

irreversible impacts. These produce dramatic changes in the landscape due to

large-scale excavation. The environmental pollution due to the opencast mining,

in general, could be broadly classified into the following categories:




• Air Pollution; • Hydrogeological Conditions; • Water Resources and Quality; • Top Soil Preservation and Utilization; • Overburden dump and stacking • Noise Levels and Vibration; • Land Reclamation and Rehabilitation; and • Afforestation Program.

2.14.1 Air Pollution

Mining operations contribute towards air pollution in two ways: addition of

gaseous pollutants to the atmosphere and the dust particles. The gaseous

pollutants include NOx, SO2 and CO. The sources of pollutants from the mining

activity include:

• Operation of Heavy Earth Moving Machinery (HEMM) which mostly run on diesel;

• Loading /unloading operations; • Transportation of ore/overburden in dumpers; and • Ripping, drilling, blasting and crushing operations.

The above points can be classified as follows:

� Point Source/Single Source

These are stationary sources, which emit air pollutants into the atmosphere from

a certain fixed point. In the proposed mine the following sources or activities form

the point sources, which emit Particulate Matter (PM). The following are the point

sources in mining process which are provided in Table-2.10.

TABLE-2.10

POINT SOURCES IN MINING OPERATIONS

Source Process Machine

Drilling Mining process DTH drilling machine

Loading Mining process Shovel

Unloading Unloading or limestone, topsoil and

Overburden

Dumper

Crushing Ore Processing Crusher

� Line Sources

These are normally mobile sources, which emit atmospheric pollutants in the area

through which they pass. The following are the sources of air pollution falling

under this category.

• Transportation

The limestone and rejects from the mine get transported to the limestone crusher

and dumps. Transportation of ore and other materials is done by using dumpers,

belt conveyors etc. Transportation also includes movement of other vehicles in




the mine lease area. The heavy traffic on the haul roads is likely to contribute

towards increase in dust concentration in the area. However, this is more of a

localized phenomenon within the mining areas that have limited human exposure.

• Ripping and Dozing

This activity is carried out with help of the dozers.

� Area Sources/Multiple Sources

These constitute pollution from various sources and activities situated in the mine

lease area. The total mine area with all its mining activities constitute the area

source. These include all the mining operation activities and equipment, which

contribute to atmospheric pollution from the various units/activities.

� Instantaneous Sources

The instantaneous sources consist of air pollution due to sudden/instantaneous

activities like blasting in the mine area.

Blasting process involves dislodgement of big blocks of rocks/ore from the mine.

This operation generates maximum dust, which results in the increase of PM

concentration. It also contributes to emissions of certain gases (Oxides of

Nitrogen and Ammonia) due to the use of explosives like ANFO.

The size of the dust particles emitted into the atmosphere play a major role in

deciding the distance to which they may be transported. Particles of larger size

fall fairly rapidly and closer to their source, because of gravitational settling.

However, the aerosols because of their small size may be held in suspension for

years in the atmosphere and may be transported on a global scale. Eventually,

these smaller particles are collected in raindrops and fall on earth. The

composition of these particles largely depends on the composition of the ore

being processed.

2.14.2 Topsoil Preservation and Utilization

The lease area has top soil ranging in thickness from 1.0 to 4.0 m and average

thickness is 2.35 m. During the plan period, 1.128 million cum of soil has been

estimated to be handled. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for

formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 ha and

remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the applied

lease covering an area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently,

the preserved top soil shall be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as

per requirement.

2.14.3 Solid Waste Generation

There is no waste handling during the plan period expect top soil. No surface

dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste generation.




2.14.4 Noise Levels and Vibration

� Noise Levels

The mining activity uses heavy earth moving equipment. The noise levels of the

major equipment are in the range of 88 to 90 dB(A). The likely noise levels of the

equipment are presented in Table-2.11.

TABLE-2.11

LIKELY NOISE LEVELS OF THE MAJOR MINING EQUIPMENT

Machines Expected Noise Levels dB(A)

Dumpers 87.5

Hydraulic Excavator 88.0

DTH Drills 89.0

Dozer 89.0

Rock Breaker 89.0

Noise levels of the mining equipment will be in the range between 87.5-89.0

dB(A). The workers at work zone operating the mining machines will be provided

with earmuffs.

� Ground Vibration

Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, noise, dust and fumes are the deleterious

effects of blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave

in the ground, which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance

to human occupants. It causes major damages to the pit configuration too.

By adopting well designed blasting, the above said problems will be greatly

minimized at the proposed mine. The impact will be minimized by choosing

proper detonating system and optimizing total charge and charge/delay. Regular

monitoring of magnitude of ground vibrations and air blast by “Minimate” will be

carried out.

2.14.5 Land Reclamation

Reclamation and rehabilitation work will be taken up along with mining. Plantation

scheme will be taken up systematically with soil binding grasses and shrubs and

followed by trees plantation at magazine section, below the mines road (slopes),

along the mines road, mines office premises, crusher and adjoining areas.


Chapter-3 Baseline Environmental Status


3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 Introduction

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study area covers 10 km radius from project boundary. The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline environmental conditions, which are described with respect to climate, hydrogeological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, ecology, land use and socio-economic profiles of people. The baseline studies have been carried out for three months, representing non monsoon season in the various domains of environment. EIA Notification requires that 10 km radius area surrounding the project site shall be covered under the study and the same is denoted as study area. As part of the study, description of biological environment and human environment such as environmental settings, demography & socio-economics, land-use/ land cover, ecology & biodiversity have been carried out for entire 10 km radius. However, as a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical environmental attributes such as ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality, noise levels, physiography, hydrology, ecology have been studied at selective locations representing various land uses such as industrial, rural/residential, commercial and sensitive locations including the densely populated areas, agricultural lands, forest lands and other ecologically sensitive areas, if any falling within 10 km radius study area. This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for three months (1st December 2015–29th February 2016) representing winter season and secondary data collected from various government and semi-government organizations. The methodology for sampling and analysis has been detailed in Annexure-IV.

3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology

3.2.1 Physiography The applied area is a relatively flat ground with slight undulation and very gentle slope towards East to South East. The surface elevation within the applied area varies from 460 m above MSL towards North-West to 400 m MSL towards South- East. The area is drained by number of easterly flowing seasonal streams, some of which join a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad Town and finally reaches Kagina River.

Drainage Pattern Drainage pattern, is dendritic to sub-dendritic in nature. The area is drained by number of easterly flowing seasonal streams, some of which join a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad Town and finally reaches Kagina river.




3.2.2 Rainfall & Climate

The southwest monsoon sets in the middle of June and extends till the end of September. Bulk of the annual rainfall occurs during this season, which constitutes over 78% of the annual rainfall. Significant rainfall occurs during the winter monsoon owing to northeastern monsoon, which constitutes 9% of the annual rainfall. Normal Rainfall of the district is 7738 mm (2001 - 2010) and actual rainfall is 674 mm (2011).

3.2.3 Drainage

Krishna and Bhima rivers drain the district. They constitute the two major river basins of the district. Kagna and Amarja are the two sub - basins of Bhima river, which occur within the geographical area of the district. Drainage map of Gulbarga district is given in Figure-3.2.1.

3.2.4 Soils

The soil types in the district are deep black, medium black soil, shallow soil and lateritic soil. The deep & medium black soil covers practically the entire district's area, except a small portion towards the northern part of the district. Black soil has been derived from basaltic rocks and varies in colour from medium to deep black. Its thickness varies from 0.5 to 3.6 m. Infiltration rate of shallow, medium and deep black soil is moderate to poor. Infiltration rate of medium black soil recorded in the district is 2.5 cm/hr.

Lateritic soil occurs in small extent towards the northern part of the district and its thickness varies from 1.0 to 5.0 m. It has moderate to good infiltration characteristics.

3.2.5 Geology

Geologically the southern part of the district comprises the Peninsular Gneiss and granites. Central, northeastern and southwestern part comprises of sedimentary formations viz. sandstone, quartzite, shale, slate, limestone and dolomite. Deccan Trap basalts cover northern and northwestern parts. A small portion in the north is covered by alluvium and in the northeastern part by laterite. The geological map of the Gulbarga district is given in Figure-3.2.2.

3.2.6 Hydrogeology

The hydrogeological studies to understand the local geology, geomorphic features, drainage network, aquifer characteristics and yield of water. Accordingly, various components controlling the hydrogeological regime. The hydrogeology map of Gulbarga district is given in Figure-3.2.3.

• Occurrence of Ground Water

Ground water systems are a result of the complex combination of different lithological and structural types within an area that together constitute an aquifer within which ground water accumulates and moves. Rather than describing individual lithologies and their tendencies to form aquifers or otherwise, it is useful to describe the ground water as one continuous across various lithological types (Kulkarni and Deolankar, 1995).




FIGURE-3.2.1

DRAINAGE MAP OF GULBARGA DISTRICT

FIGURE-3.2.2

GEOLOGICAL MAP OF GULBARGA DISTRICT

Project Site

Project Site




Major ground water bearing formations are granite, gneiss, limestone and vesicular basalt. Ground water occurs in weathered, fractured & jointed zones of these formations. In weathered zones ground water occurs in phreatic condition, whereas in the fractured & jointed formation it occurs in semi-confined to confined condition. The main source of recharge to ground water is precipitation, followed by seepage from canals and return flow from irrigation. Deccan Trap basalts, which comprise different flows, fractures & interstitial pore spaces of vesicular zone, are good repositories of ground water. In limestone, solution cavities are considered to be more potential than weathered and fractured zones. Laterite have primary porosity and are considered to be moderately good aquifer.

• Depth to Water Level

As per the CGWB report-2013. Out of 73 National Hydrograph Station (NHS) dug wells located in Gulbarga district, the depth to water levels recorded during pre and post monsoon periods are 1.87 to 16.75 m bgl and 0.68 to 11.98 m bgl respectively. Depth to water level in 24 NHS piezometers in the district during pre–monsoon (May 2011) and post–monsoon (Nov. 2011) periods were in the range of 1.20 to 15.70 m bgl and 1.01 to 13.36 m bgl respectively.

• Seasonal Ground Water Level Fluctuation

Subsequent to seasonal rainfall, ground water level records a rise, indicating recharge to ground water. During pre-monsoon period there is depletion of ground water level due to exploitation, natural discharge and no recharge. This is manifested as fall in ground water level during pre-monsoon period. Therefore, ground water level in general shows a receding trend from December to May. Seasonal water level fluctuation (May & November 2011) as observed in 60 NHS dug wells indicate that in 85% of NHS there is rise in ground water level in the range of 0.032 to 1.309 m, whereas in 14% of NHS there is fall in ground water level in the range of 0.024 to1.602 m. Seasonal water level fluctuation as observed in 12 NHS piezometers indicate that there is rise in ground water level in the range of 0.060 to 1.630 m and fall in the range of 0.151 to 0.181 m.




FIGURE-3.2.3 HYDROGEOLOGICAL MAP OF GULBARAG DISTRICT

• Long–term Water Level Trend

Pre-monsoon ground water level data for NHS in Gulbarga district, water level trend (2002–2011) of 41 NHS show rise in the range of 0.005 to 1.034 m/year. Similarly, for 14 NHS falling trend in the range of 0.002 to 0.944 m/year. Rising water level trend during pre–monsoon period may be attributed to less ground water draft and recharge through canal, tanks or reservoir. Post–monsoon water level trend (2002–2011) indicate that in 53 NHS there is rise in the range of 0.010 to 1.230 m/year. Similarly, water level trend of 7 NHS show fall in the range of 0.025 to 0.391 m/year. Falling water level trend during post–monsoon period may be attributed to poor recharge to ground water and excessive ground water draft. In some NHS, rising trend of ground water level is observed in both pre and post monsoon periods, which indicates that there is good source for ground water recharge or generally ground water draft is less.

Project Site




• Aquifer System Encountered in the Area

Under, ground water exploration programme of CGWB, in the district, attempt has been made to study aquifer geometry & parameters through drilling exploratory bore wells. The selection of sites of all such bore wells was done based on detailed hydrogeological investigation and geophysical surveys. The aquifer zones in the area have been found to occur under phreatic condition at shallow depth primarily in the weathered formation, followed by semi– confined to confined condition in fractured & jointed formation at greater depth. Geological formations occurring in the district are deccan trap basalts, sedimentary of bhima formation and peninsular gneisses & granites. In Deccan trap basalts, exploratory bore wells have been drilled to depth ranging from 20 to 101 m bgl. The thickness of weathered zone encountered ranges from 0.95 to 17 m. Water bearing fractures occur within the depth range of 3.5 to 90 m bgl. Drill time discharge ranges from 0.40 to 3.7 lps. Transmissivity ranges from 16.50 to 174 m2/day. The depth of exploratory bore wells drilled in the sedimentary of Bhima formation range from 18 to 92 m bgl. The thickness of weathered zone encountered range from 1.5 to 10 m. Water bearing fractures occur within the depth range of 4.5 to 92 m bgl. Drill time discharge ranges from 0.05 to 9.5 lps. Transmissivity ranges from 91.30 to 370 m2/day. The depth of exploratory bore wells drilled in gneisses and granite range from 8.0 to 90 m bgl. The thickness of weathered zone encountered range from 1.7 to 18.5 m. Water bearing fractures occur within the depth range of 7.5 to 90 m bgl. Drill time discharge ranges from 0.60 to 28.0 lps. 3.2.7 Ground Water Resources

• Ground Water Recharge

The main source of ground water recharge is by the rainfall by direct percolation to the zone of saturation. A significant part of the rainfall is lost as runoff from area while a limited percentage of rainfall therefore reaches zone of saturation and becomes the part of ground water storage after meeting the evaporation and evapo- transpiration losses. There is also ground water recharge from the return flow of irrigation water from dug wells and tube wells operated by the cultivators and from canals. The dynamic groundwater resources of Gulbarga district has been estimated jointly by CGWB and SWID. Govt of Karnataka, following the norms laid down by GEC-1997 methodology and projected as on 31.03.2011. The ground water resources of the district is given in Table-3.2.1.




TABLE-3.2.1

THE DYNAMIC GROUNDWATER RESOURCES OF GULBARGA DISTRICT AS

ON 31.03.2011

Sr.No Particulars Quantity

(HAM)

1 Total Annual Replenishable Ground Water Resources 69295 2 Natural Discharge during Non-Monsoon Period 5996 3 Net Annual Ground Water Availability 63299 4 Total Annual Ground Water Draft 20073 5 Projected demand for Domestic and Industrial uses upto 2025 4609

6 Net Ground Water Availability for Future Irrigation use 42025 7 Stage of Ground Water Development (%) 32

(“SAFE”)

The study area falls under Zone-II which comes under least to moderately seismic category as per IS-1893 (Part-I) 2002. The map indicating flood prone zones in India is shown in Figure-3.2.4.




FIGURE-3.2.4

FLOOD ZONE MAPPING

Project Site




3.3 Land Use Studies

Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play important roles for identifying sensitive issues, if any, and taking appropriate actions for maintaining the ecological balance in the development of the region.

3.3.1 Objectives

The objectives of land use studies are:

• To determine the present land use pattern;

• To analyze the impacts on land use due to mine activities in the study area; and

• To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis growth of mine activities in the study area and its associated impacts.

3.3.2 Methodology

For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as District Census Handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various sources like District Census Handbook, Revenue records, state and central government offices and Survey of India (SOI) Topo-sheets and also through primary field surveys.

3.3.3 Land use Based on Secondary Data

Based on the census report, 10 km radial distance around this mine boundary has been considered in the study. These areas were studied in detail to get the idea of land use pattern in the study area. The land use census data 2011 is presented in Table-3.3.1. The village wise land use data is presented in Annexure-VII.

TABLE-3.3.1 LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr.No Particulars of Landuse (in ha) 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km (%)

1 Forest Area 0.00 2.00 3.00 5.00 0.01 2 Land under Cultivation

a) Irrigation Land 0.00 2.00 281.00 283.00 0.51 b) Un Irrigated Land 2358.30 17579.60 26806.43 46744.33 83.70

c) Land Under Miscellaneous Tree Crops etc. Area 4.75 8.52 8.84 22.11 0.04

3 Area not Available for Cultivation

a)Area under Non-Agricultural Uses 37.32 602.47 2068.29 2708.08 4.85 b)Barren & Un-cultivable Land Area 40.52 396.46 503.92 940.90 1.68 c)Permanent Pastures and Other Grazing Land Area 3.64 105.50 183.00 292.14 0.52

4 Fallows Land other than Current Fallows Area 0.00 23.57 93.60 117.17 0.21

5 Current Fallows Area 0.00 206.37 169.32 375.69 0.67 6 Culturable Waste Land Area 14.17 126.80 465.28 606.25 1.09 7 Urban Area 0.00 3099.64 652.75 3752.39 6.72 Total Geographical Area 2458.70 22152.93 31235.43 55847.06 100.00

Source: Census of India –2011




• Forest

The revenue forest land under the study area consists 5.00 ha (0.01 %) of the total geographic area.

• Land under Cultivation

Altogether 47049.44 ha cultivable land (irrigated, un-irrigated and land Under miscellaneous tree crops etc.) was observed in the study area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 283.00 ha in the study area which works out to be 0.51% of total study area. The un-irrigated land admeasures about 46744.33 ha and works out to about 83.70% of the total study area. Land under miscellaneous tree crops area admeasures to about 22.11 ha and works out 0.04% of the total study area.

• Land not available for Cultivation

The land not available for cultivation is 7.05% of the total study area, which includes area of land with scrub, land without scrub, permanent pastures, quarry, mining area, rocky/ stony and barren area.

• Fallows Land other than Current Fallow Land

This includes all land which was taken up for cultivation but is temporarily out of Cultivation for a period of not less than one year and not more than five years. The fallows land is 0.21% in the study area.

• Current Fallow Land

This represents cropped area which is kept fallow during the current year. The current fallow land is 0.67% in the total study area.

• Cultivable Waste

This land includes that land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallow or covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass, bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and village common lands are also included in this category. The study area comprises about 1.09% cultivable wastelands.

• Urban Area

An urban area is a location characterized by high human population density and vast human-built features in comparison to the areas surrounding it. Urban areas may be cities, towns and towns or conurbations, but the term is not commonly extended to rural settlements such as villages and hamlets. The urban area under the study area consists 3752.39 ha (6.72%) of the total geographic area.




3.3.4 Land Use Based on Satellite Imagery

Present land use based on remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the 10 km radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been prepared. The detailed report enclosed as Annexure-VIII.

3.4 Soil Characteristics

It is essential to determine the potential of soil in the area and identify the impacts of urbanization and industrialization on soil quality. Accordingly, a study of assessment of the soil quality has been carried out.

3.4.1 Data Generation

For studying soil profile of the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil conditions in and around the mine lease area representing various land use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil upto a depth of 90 cm. A total of eight samples within the study area were collected and analysed. The details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table-3.4.1 and are shown in Figure-3.4.1. The sampling has been carried out once in the study period.

TABLE-3.4.1

DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Location Distance (km) Direction

S1 Mine Lease Area (core area) -- --

S2 Kirni 4.5 W

S3 Near Telgul 5.2 NW

S4 Muthur 4.8 N

S5 Dewan Tegnur 4.2 NE

S6 Taranhalli 1.0 E

S7 Shahabad 1.7 SE

S8 Tonsanhalli 0.5 SW

The soil quality at all the locations during the study period is given in Table-

3.4.2. The results are compared with standard classification given in Table-

3.4.3.




FIGURE-3.4.1

SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS




TABLE-3.4.2

SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Parameters S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 pH (1:2.5 soil water extract) 8.20 8.23 7.89 8.08 8.12 8.73 8.41 8.31

Electrical Conductivity (µs/cm) (1:5 soil water extract)

157.8 113.1 569 141.5 127.2 432 206 148.6

Texture Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Clay Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Sandy Clay

Clay

Sand (%) 48 45 24 42 46 43 46 19

Silt (%) 31 30 25 29 26 37 22 32

Clay (%) 21 25 51 29 28 20 32 49

Bulk Density (g/cc) 1.16 1.09 0.96 1.21 1.19 1.25 1.1 0.91

Exchangeable Calcium as Ca ( mg/kg)

11022 13426.8 10521 13326.6 11422.8 6212.4 2125.4 11022

Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg ( mg/kg)

1580.8 608 1884.8 1459.2 1763.2 729.6 230.4 1884.8

Exchangeable Sodium as Na ( mg/kg)

49.8 46.1 240 55 64 1260 51.3 524

Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) 0.12 0.11 0.57 0.12 0.15 4.0 0.28 1.21

Available Nitrogen as N (kg/ha) 54 64.6 102.9 95.6 58.8 75.8 93.4 43.6

Available Phosphorus as P (kg/ha) 6.0 7.5 3.3 9.4 31.7 4.3 26.3 33.7

Available Potassium as K (kg/ha) 855.8 702.8 854.9 898.4 630.8 503.8 326.1 503.5

Organic Carbon (%) 0.48 0.61 1.11 0.82 0.51 0.63 0.56 0.50

Organic Matter (%) 0.83 1.05 1.91 1.41 0.88 1.08 0.96 0.85

Water Soluble Chlorides as Cl (mg/kg)

88.6 70.9 177.2 106.3 70.9 141.8 70.6 124.1

Water Soluble Sulphates as SO4

(mg/kg)

56.4 6.4 60.3 39.7 37.8 64.1 11.3 4.5

Aluminum (%) 3.18 4.9 4.82 6.35 4.71 4.27 2.9 6.01

Total Iron (%) 3.2 4.5 4.36 6.79 5.06 3.86 2.6 5.18

Manganese (mg/kg) 1242.6 1458.6 1258.9 1693.6 1631.5 635.2 573.4 1192.8

Boron (mg/kg) 9.9 15.8 18.8 19.9 15.2 31.8 20.6 15.9

Zinc (mg/kg) 45.8 79.3 81.2 112.0 85.8 75.9 51.3 86.0

TABLE-3.4.3

STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Sr.No. Soil Test Classification

1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic 4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic 5.00 - 5.50 slightly acidic 5.51-6.0 moderately acidic 6.01-6.50 slightly acidic 6.51-7.30 Neutral 7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline 7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline 8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline 9.01 very strongly alkaline

2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity (mmhos/cm) (1 ppm = 640 µmhos/cm)

Upto 1.00 Average 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts)

3 Organic Carbon Upto 0.2: very less 0.21-0.4: less 0.41-0.5 medium, 0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient 0.81-1.00: sufficient >1.0 more than sufficient




Sr.No. Soil Test Classification

4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Upto 50 very less 51-100 less 101-150 good 151-300 Better >300 sufficient

5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 very less 16-30 less 31-50 medium, 51-65 on an average sufficient 66-80 sufficient >80 more than sufficient

6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0 -120 very less 120-180 less 181-240 medium 241-300 average 301-360 better >360 more than sufficient

Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, ICAR

3.4.2 Baseline Soil Status

It has been observed that the texture of soil is mostly sandy clay in the study area. The common color of the soil ranged from light brown to black. It has been observed that the pH of the soil quality ranged from 7.89 – 8.73 indicating that the soil is usually moderately alkaline to strongly alkaline in nature. The electrical conductivity was observed to be in the range of 113.1 – 569.0 µS/cm, with the maximum (569.0 µS/cm) observed at S3 and with the minimum (113.1 µS/cm) observed at S2. The nitrogen values ranged between 43.6 – 102.9 kg/ha. The maximum value (102.9 kg/ha) was found at S3 indicating that the soil is having good quantity of Nitrogen. The minimum value (43.6 kg/ha) was observed at S8 indicating that the soil has very less quantity of nitrogen. The phosphorus values range between 3.3 – 33.7 kg/ha. The maximum value (33.7 kg/ha) was found at S8 indicating that the soil has medium quantity of Phosphorus. The minimum value (3.3 kg/ha) was observed at S3 indicating that the soil has on a very less quantity of Phosphorus. The potassium values range between 326.1 – 898.4 kg/ha. The maximum value (898.4 kg/ha) was found at S4 indicating that the soil has more than sufficient quantity of Potassium. The minimum value (326.1 kg/ha) was observed at S7 indicating that the soil has better quantity of potassium.

3.5 Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input prediction models for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the region.




The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:

• Winter season : December to February • Pre-monsoon season : March to May • Monsoon season : June to September • Post-monsoon season : October to November On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. Data was collected at site every hour continuously from 1st December 2015 to 29th February 2016. The generated data then compared with the meteorological data generated by nearest India Meteorological Department (IMD) station located at Gulbarga. The available meteorological data of IMD, Gulbarga station has been collected and analyzed.

3.5.1 Methodology

Site specific data covering micro-meteorological parameters were recorded on hourly basis during the study period and comprises of parameters like wind speed, wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover. The minimum, maximum and average values for all the parameters except wind speed and direction are presented in Table-3.5.1.

TABLE-3.5.1

SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE

Month Temperature (0C) Relative

Humidity (%) Rainfall (mm)

Atmospheric Pressure (mb)

Min Max Min Max Min Max

December, 2015 20.3 31.2 33 58 -- 961.3 965.4 January, 2016 18.1 32.4 29 55 -- 960.8 964.9 February, 2016 22.2 33.6 26 45 -- 959.1 963.5 Range 18.1 – 33.6 26 - 58 -- 959.1 – 965.4

� Wind Speed/ Directions

The windrose for the study period representing winter season is shown in Figure-

3.5.1 and presented in Table-3.5.2.

TABLE-3.5.2

SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN AT THE STUDY AREA

Season Winter season 2016

First Predominant Wind Direction E (27.9%)

Second Predominant Wind Direction NE (19.3%) Calm conditions (%) 16.7%

Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates percentage of time wind blows

� Study Period

Predominant winds from E direction were observed for 27.9% of the total time. In the NE direction winds were observed for 19.3% of the total time. Whereas in SE direction the winds were observed for 7.3% of the total time. In other directions, the percentage frequencies observed were S (5.2%), N (3.6%), W (3.4%), SW




(2.8%), ENE (2.5%), ESE (1.9%), SSE & NNE (1.7%), NNW (1.5%), NW (1.3%), WSW (1.2%), SSW (1.1%) and WNW (0.9%). Calm conditions prevailed for 16.7% of the time.

3.5.2 Secondary Data Collected from IMD- Gulbarga

Secondary data from IMD-Gulbarga has been collected for pressure, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction. The data at IMD is usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr.

3.5.2.1 Meteorological Data

The meteorological data is collected from the IMD-Gulbarga, which is the nearest IMD station to the project site. The data collected from IMD includes wind speed, wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of 10 years. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are collected for all the parameters except wind speed and direction. The collected data is tabulated in Table-3.5.3.

TABLE-3.5.3

CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA-STATION: IMD, GULBARGA

Month Atmospheric Pressure

(mb)

Temperature (0C) Relative

Humidity (%)

Rainfall

(mm)

0830 1730 Max Min 0830 1730

January 963.7 959.7 30.4 16.0 54 27 1.3 February 962.2 958.0 33.4 18.5 43 24 5.2

March 960.5 955.9 36.8 21.7 36 20 11.2 April 958.7 953.5 39.1 25.0 41 22 16.8 May 956.6 950.8 40.2 26.3 47 26 39.9 June 954.3 950.3 35.0 23.8 71 47 110.2 July 954.1 950.7 31.4 22.5 81 62 150.8

August 955.1 951.3 31.2 22.2 81 59 142.9 September 956.9 953.0 31.1 21.9 80 61 178.3 October 959.8 956.0 31.9 21.0 68 48 71.0 November 962.6 958.6 30.4 17.5 57 35 23.8 December 963.8 959.9 29.5 15.1 56 31 1.4

Range 950.3-963.8 15.1-40.2 20-81 Total: 752.8

3.5.2.2 Wind Speed/Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light and moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon hours the winds were stronger. The wind roses for the study period representing winter, pre-monsoon, monsoon and post-monsoon seasons along with annual windrose are shown in Figure-3.5.2, Figure-3.5.3 and Figure-3.5.4 and presented in Table-3.5.4.




TABLE-3.5.4

SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN – IMD GULBARGA

Season First Predominant

Winds Second Predominant Winds % Calm

Condition

0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730

Pre-Monsoon W (22.0) W (21.0) N (16.4) E (18.0) 11.7 7.0 Monsoon W (55.0) W (56.7) SW (32.3) SW (18.3) 3.8 2.5 Post Monsoon NE (32.0) E (42.5) E (30.0) NE (28.0) 16.5 7.0 Winter E (29.8) E (40.0) NE (28.4) NE (14.0) 22.3 7.4 Annual W (20.2) E (26.0) NE (18.1) W (22.2) 13.6 5.9

Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates % of time wind blows from direction

3.5.3 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Data

The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day viz. 0830 hr and 1730 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an hourly interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis-à-vis the IMD data, slight variations were observed. The following observations are brought out: • The temperature was recorded on site when compared vis-à-vis the IMD data,

slight variations were found. The minimum and maximum temperatures recorded at site during the study period were 18.1 0C and 33.6 OC, whereas the minimum and maximum values recorded at IMD-Gulbarga during the same period are 15.1oC and 33.4oC respectively;

• The relative humidity was observed to range from 26%–58% during the study

period at the site, whereas according to IMD-Gulbarga the relative humidity was observed to be in the range of 24%–56 % during the same season; and

• The wind pattern of the study area is broadly in comparison with the IMD data.

The data generated at project site when compared with the data recorded at IMD, it is observed that the data generated at the site is broadly in comparison with regional meteorology, except minor variations as described above.




FIGURE-3.5.1

SITE SPECIFIC WINTER SEASON WINDROSE (2016)

C-16.7%

N 3

.6%

NN

E 1

.7%

NE 19.

3%

ENE 2.5%

E 27.9%

ESE 1.9%

SE 7.3%

SS

E 1.7%S

5.2%

SS

W 1

.1%

SW 2

.8%

WSW 1.2%

W 3.4%

WNW 0.9%

NW 1.3%

NN

W 1.5%

CALMSPEED

SCALE 5%

1.0 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr




FIGURE-3.5.2

PRE-MONSOON AND MONSOON SEASONS-IMD GULBARGA

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 4.1%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

7.0%

SW

8.7%

S

E 10.1%ESE 0%

C-11.7%22.0% W

NE 11.

0%

NN

E 0

%

N 1

6.4%

0% N

NW

8.0% NW

Pre Monsoon

8-30 Hrs

0% WNW

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 6.7%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

10.6

% S

W

9.0%

S

E 18.0%

ESE 0%

C-7.0%21.0% W

NE 11.0

%

NN

E 0

%

N 9

.8%

0% N

NW

6.9%

NW

0% WNW

1

SPEED CALM

115 19 >19 Km/hr

SCALE 5%

Pre Monsoon

17-30 Hrs

ENE 0%

0% WSW SE 0.6%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

32.3

% S

W

1.6%

S

E 1.0%ESE 0%

C-3.8%55.0% W

NE 1.0

%

NN

E 0

%

N 1

.2%

0% N

NW

3.5% NW

0% WNW

ENE 0%

0% WSW SE 1.8%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

18.3

% S

W 1.

7% S

E 3.8%ESE 0%

C-2.5%56.7% W

NE 4.8%

NN

E 0

%N 4

.1%

0% N

NW

6.3% NW

0% WNW

Monsoon

8-30 Hrs

Monsoon

17-30 Hrs




FIGURE-3.5.3

POST MONSOON AND WINTER SEASONS-IMD GULBARGA

1

SPEED CALM

115 19 >19 Km/hr

SCALE 5%

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 3.0%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

1.5%

SW

3.5%

S

E 30.0%

ESE 0%

C-16.5%5.0% W

NE 32.

0%

NN

E 0

%N 5

.5%

0% N

NW

3.0% NW

0% WNW

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 5.0%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

2.5%

SW

3.5%

SE 42.5%

ESE 0%

C-7.0%4.0% W

NE 28.

0%

NN

E 0

%

N 4

.5%

0% N

NW

3.0% NW

0% WNW Post Monsoon

8-30 Hrs

Post Monsoon

17-30 Hrs

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 5.0%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

1.0%

SW

6.7%

S

E 29.8%

ESE 0%

C-22.3%1.1% W

NE 28.

4%

NN

E 0

%N 5

.0%

0% N

NW

0.7% NW

0% WNW

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 13.0%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

5.0%

SW

8.4%

S

E 40.0%

ESE 0%

C-7.4%7.1% W

NE 14.

0%

NN

E 0

%

N 3

.3%0.4%

NN

W

1.4% NW

0% WNW

Winter

8-30 Hrs

Winter

17-30 Hrs




FIGURE-3.5.4

ANNAUL WINDROSES-IMD GULBARGA

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 3.1%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

10.4

% S

W

5.2%

S

E 17.7%ESE 0%

C-13.6%20.2% W

NE 18.

1%

NN

E 0

%

N 7

.0%

0% N

NW

3.8% NW

0% WNW

ENE 0%

0% WSW

SE 6.8%

SS

E 0%

0% S

SW

8.9%

SW

5.7%

S

E 26.0%ESE 0%

C-5.9%22.2% W

NE 14.

5%

NN

E 0

%N 5

.4%

0.1% N

NW

4.5% NW

0% WNW

1

SPEED CALM

115 19 >19 Km/hr

SCALE 5%

Annual

8-30 Hrs

Annual

17-30 Hrs




3.6 Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km radius around the mine lease forms the baseline information. The prime objective of the baseline air quality study was to assess the existing air quality of the area. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during the operation of mine. The study area represents mostly rural/residential environment.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out during December 2015 to February 2016 representing winter season.

3.6.1 Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the following considerations:

• Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale; • Topography of the study area; • Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;

and • Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at eight locations with due consideration to the above mentioned points during December 2015 to February 2016. Table-3.6.1 gives the details of environmental setting around each monitoring station. The locations of the selected stations with reference to the mine area are given in the same table and shown in Figure-3.6.1.

Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per week for three months (December 2015 to February 2016) at each location representing winter season. Ambient air quality at 8 locations within the study area of 10 km radial distance from project site within two down wind directions is presented in Table-3.6.1. The baseline data of air environment was monitored for parameters mentioned below:

• Particulate Matter (PM10); • Particulate Matter (PM2.5); • Sulphur Dioxide (SO2); • Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx); • Carbon Monoxide (CO); • Ozone (O3); • Ammonia (NH3); • Lead (Pb); • Benzo(a) pyrene (BaP) in particulate phase; • Arsenic (As); • Nickel (Ni); and • Benzene (C6H6).




FIGURE-3.6.1

AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS

C-16.7%

N 3

.6%

NN

E 1

.7%

NE 19.

3%

ENE 2.5%

E 27.9%

ESE 1.9%

SE 7.3%

SS

E 1.7%S

5.2%

SS

W 1

.1%

SW 2

.8%

WSW 1.2%

W 3.4%

WNW 0.9%

NW 1.3%

NN

W 1.5%

CALMSPEED

SCALE 5%

1.0 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr




TABLE-3.6.1

DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Station Code

Name of the Station Distance (km) Direction Environmental Setting w.r.t. ML Area

AAQ1 ML site (core area) - - - AAQ2 Kirni village 4.5 W Downwind AAQ3 Near Telgul village 5.2 NW Crosswind AAQ4 Muthur village 4.8 N Crosswind AAQ5 Dewan Tegnur village 4.2 NE Upwind

AAQ6 Taranhalli village 1.0 E Upwind AAQ7 Shahabad Town 1.7 SE Crosswind AAQ8 Near Tonsanhalli village 0.5 SW Downwind

� Duration of Sampling

The sampling duration for PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx is twenty four hourly continuous samples per day and CO and HC are sampled for 8 hours continuously thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) (November 2009).

3.6.2 Presentation of Primary Data

Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, minimum and maximum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The results of monitoring carried out are presented in Annexure-IX. The summary of these results representing winter season are given in Table-3.6.2. These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for rural and residential zone and industrial zone.

TABLE-3.6.2

SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS – WINTER (2015-2016)

Station Code

Location/ Village PM10 PM2.5

Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%

AAQ1 Mine Area 23.1 37.0 32.1 36.6 10.4 14.6 12.5 14.4

AAQ2 Kirni Village 20.9 28.6 24.7 28.2 11.3 15.4 13.3 15.2

AAQ3 Near Telgul Village 21.6 35.0 26.5 34.3 11.4 15.5 13.5 15.3

AAQ4 Muthur Village 26.9 34.6 30.7 34.2 13.7 17.6 15.7 17.4

AAQ5 Dewan Tegnur Village 23.8 30.1 26.2 29.4 11.9 15.1 13.1 14.7

AAQ6 Taranhalli Village 35.1 47.3 43.5 46.8 15.2 26.0 22.3 25.5

AAQ7 Shahabad Town 38.3 52.0 45.7 51.0 24.1 30.0 26.9 29.5

AAQ8 Tonsanhalli Village 20.5 35.0 26.4 34.1 11.1 15.2 13.1 15.0

Range 20.5 – 52.0 10.4 – 30.0

Station Code

Location/ Village SO2 NOX


AAQ1 Mine Area 7.8 8.9 8.2 8.8 9.6 10.7 10.1 10.7 AAQ2 Kirni Village 7.5 9.6 8.7 9.5 9.7 11.8 10.6 11.8 AAQ3 Near Telgul Village 8.2 10.3 9.4 10.2 9.3 12.4 11.0 12.4 AAQ4 Muthur Village 8.7 10.8 9.9 10.7 10.5 13.6 12.2 13.6 AAQ5 Dewan Tegnur Village 9.9 12.3 11.0 12.1 11.8 14.1 12.8 14.1

AAQ6 Taranhalli Village 10.2 13.1 11.7 12.8 12.2 14.8 13.5 14.8 AAQ7 Shahabad Town 11.1 13.7 12.4 13.6 13.9 16.2 15.1 16.2 AAQ8 Tonsanhalli Village 8.2 9.3 8.7 9.3 9.2 11.3 10.2 11.3

Range 7.5 – 13.7 9.2 – 16.2




Station Code

Location/ Village CO O3


AAQ1 Mine Area 219 290 250 290 1.3 6.1 3.4 5.9

AAQ2 Kirni Village 223 360 290 351 1.7 5.2 3.2 5.1

AAQ3 Near Telgul Village 228 329 277 327 2.3 6.9 4.3 6.5

AAQ4 Muthur Village 238 355 308 354 2.2 6.4 4.3 6.1

AAQ5 Dewan Tegnur Village 246 315 278 315 2.1 6.7 4.1 6.5

AAQ6 Taranhalli Village 231 348 274 344 1.5 6.7 4.0 6.6

AAQ7 Shahabad Town 267 383 337 382 2.5 7.1 4.8 6.8

AAQ8 Tonsanhalli Village 225 292 264 290 1.8 6.4 4.1 5.6

Range 219 - 383 1.3 – 7.1

Station Code

Location/ Village NH3 (µg/m3) Pb (µg/m3)


AAQ1 Mine Area <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ2 Kirni Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ3 Near Telgul Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ4 Muthur Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ5 Dewan Tegnur

Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

AAQ6 Taranhalli Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ7 Shahabad Town <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 AAQ8 Tonsanhalli Village <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Range <20.0 <0.001

Station Code

Location/ Village Bap (ng/m3) As (µg/m3)



Village <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001


Range <0.01 <0.001

Station

Code

Location/ Village Ni (µg/m3) C6H6 (µg/m3)



Village <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01


Range <0.001 <0.01

• Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM2.5 were recorded as 10.4 µg/m3

and 30.0 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration was recorded at Mine area (AAQ1) maximum concentration was recorded at Shahabad Town (AAQ7).




• Particulate Matter (PM10)

The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM10 were recorded as 20.5 µg/m3 and 52.0 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration and the maximum concentrations were recorded near Tonsanhalli Village (AAQ8) and Shahabad Town (AAQ7). • Sulphur Dioxide

The minimum and maximum SO2 concentrations were recorded as 7.5 µg/m3 and 13.7 µg/m3. The minimum concentration was recorded at Kirni Village (AAQ2) and the maximum concentration was recorded at Shahabad Town (AAQ7). • Nitrogen Oxide

The minimum of 9.2 µg/m3 observed at Tonsanhalli Village (AAQ8) and maximum concentration of 16.2 µg/m3 for NOx was recorded at Shahabad Town (AAQ7).

• Carbon Monoxide

The minimum and maximum carbon monoxide concentrations were recorded as

219 µg/m3 and 383 µg/m3.

• Hydrocarbons

The values of hydrocarbons are observed below detectable levels.

• Ozone (O3)

The minimum and maximum O3 concentrations were recorded as 1.3 µg/m3 and 7.1 µg/m3.

• Ammonia (NH3)

The values of NH3 are observed <20.0 µg/m3.

• Lead (Pb)

The values of Pb are observed <0.001 µg/m3.

• Benzo ( a) Pyrene (BaP)

The values of BaP are observed <0.01 ng/m3.

• Arsenic (As)

The values of As are observed <0.001 µg/m3.

• Nickel (Ni)

The values of Ni are observed <0.001 µg/m3.

• Benzene (C6H6)

The values of C6H6 are observed <0.01 µg/m3.

Air quality monitoring was carried out as per G.S.R no. 826 (E), dated 16th November 2009 and the observations at all the monitored locations are well within the limits as per prescribed standards.




3.7 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water and surface water resources within 10 km radius of the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluate anticipated impact of the mining activity. Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment and to identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.

The purpose of this study is to:

• Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters; and • Predict the impact of water quality by these mining and related activities.

The information required has been collected through primary surveys and secondary sources. Eight groundwater sources and two surface water source covering 10 km radial distance were examined for physico-chemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of existing industrial and other activities on water. The samples were collected and analysed once during the study period. The samples were analyzed as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater' published by American Public Health Association (APHA).

3.7.1 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from ten sampling locations. These samples were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for various parameters to compare with the standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500. The water sampling locations are listed below in Table-3.7.1 and are shown in Figure-3.7.1. The results of monitoring carried out for the study are presented in Table-3.7.2 and 3.7.3.

TABLE-3.7.1

DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Location Distance (km) Direction

Ground Water

GW1 Mine Area -- --

GW2 Kirni 4.5 W

GW3 Near Telgul 5.2 NW

GW4 Muthur 4.8 N

GW5 Dewan Tegnur 4.2 NE

GW6 Taranhalli 1.0 E

GW7 Shahabad 1.7 SE

GW8 Tonsanhalli 1.7 SW

Surface Water

SW1 Nandana Halla u/s 2.6 E

SW2 Kagna River d/s 4.2 SE




3.7.2 Presentation of Results

� Ground Water

The results for the parameters analyzed for ground water samples are presented in Table-3.7.2 and are compared with standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500-2012 "Specifications for Drinking Water".

Most of the villages in the study area have bore well and tube well facilities and river Kagina and Nandana halla is flowing through the study area. The residents of the villages make use of this water for drinking and other domestic uses. In total 8 water samples were collected from different sources around the project site within the periphery of 10 km.

The pH of the water samples collected ranges in between 7.0 to 7.92. The conductivity recorded in between 550 to 3142 µmhos/cm in the sample.

Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 160 to 580 mg/l. The concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 1.6 to 236.5 mg/l with higher concentration of nitrate observed in Muthur village (GW4) sample. The chemical analysis of ground water samples revealed that these water samples are slightly alkaline in nature. This may be attributed to the local geologic conditions. � Surface Water

Two surface water samples have been collected from nearby river (60 m upstream and downstream) and other surface drains. The physical, chemical and biological characterization is given in Table-3.7.3. The results for the parameters analyzed for ground water samples are presented in Table-3.6.2 and are compared with standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500-2012 "Specifications for Drinking Water".

The pH of the surface water samples collected ranges in between 7.67 to 7.88. The conductivity recorded in between 563 to 572 µs/cm in the sample. Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 is 165 mg/l. The concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 1.0 to 1.5 mg/l.




FIGURE-3.7.1

WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS




TABLE-3.7.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY

Sr. No.

Parameters IS:10500

Limits Units

GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4

1 pH 6.5 – 8.5 (NR) - 7.13 7.31 7.29 7.0 2 Colour 5 (25) Hazen 3 2 3 2 3 Taste Agreeable - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

4 Odour Agreeable - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 5 Conductivity $ uS/cm 850 1293 2005 3142 6 Turbidity 5 (10) NTU 8 4 3 2 7 TDS 500 (2000) mg/l 590 912 1400 2120

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3

300 (600) mg/l 340 215 275 580

9 Total Alkalinity 200 (600) mg/l 360 395 505 625 10 Calcium as Ca 75 (200) mg/l 114 46 46 162 11 Magnesium as Mg 30 (100) mg/l 13.4 24.3 38.9 42.5 12 Residual Chlorine 0.2 min mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 13 Boron as B 1 mg/l 0.21 0.68 0.80 0.68

14 Chlorides as Cl 250 (1000) mg/l 7.8 24.2 121.9 357.3 15 Sulphates as SO4 200 (400) mg/l 10.4 111.6 133.1 229 16 Fluorides as F 1.0 (1.5) mg/l 0.7 1.4 1.3 0.5 17 Nitrates as NO3 45 (NR) mg/l 43.8 105.6 213 236.5

18 Phenolic Compounds

0.001 (0.002) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

19 Cyanides as CN 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

20 Anionic Detergents

0.2 (1.0) mg/l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

21 Mineral Oil 0.1 (0.03) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 22 Cadmium as Cd 0.003 (NR) mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.05) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l 0.02 <0.01 <0.01 0.01

25 Lead as Pb 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 26 Manganese as Mn 0.1 (0.3) mg/l 0.09 0.01 <0.01 0.08 27 Iron as Fe 0.3 (NR) mg/l 0.32 0.26 0.18 0.13 28 Chromium as Cr+6 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 29 Selenium as Se 0.01(NR) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

30 Zinc as Zn 5 (15) mg/l 3.2 0.17 0.03 8.2 31 Aluminum as Al 0.03 (0.2) mg/l 0.09 0.04 0.09 0.086 32 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (NR) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 33 Pesticides Absent mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent 34 E. Coil Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

35 Total Coliforms 10 MPN/100 ml <2 <2 <2 <2




TABLE-3.7.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY

Sr. No

Parameters IS:10500

Limits Units

GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8

1 pH 6.5 – 8.5

(NR) -

7.06 7.37 7.14 7.92

2 Colour 5 (25) Hazen 5 4 6 5 3 Taste Agreeable - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

4 Odour Agreeable - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 5 Conductivity $ uS/cm 1375 901 1856 550 6 Turbidity 5 (10) NTU 2 6 5 9 7 TDS 500 (2000) mg/l 962 610 1235 365

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3

300 (600) mg/l 360 260 335 160

9 Total Alkalinity 200 (600) mg/l 450 350 505 200 10 Calcium as Ca 75 (200) mg/l 112 48 38 32 11 Magnesium as Mg 30 (100) mg/l 19.4 34 58.3 19.4 12 Residual Chlorine 0.2 min mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 13 Boron as B 1 mg/l 0.25 0.27 0.76 0.13 14 Chlorides as Cl 250 (1000) mg/l 56.9 19.9 150.3 28.4 15 Sulphates as SO4 200 (400) mg/l 55.4 25.6 157.4 27.8 16 Fluorides as F 1.0 (1.5) mg/l 0.6 1.2 1.3 0.4 17 Nitrates as NO3 45 (NR) mg/l 113.4 44.1 43.9 1.6

18 Phenolic Compounds

0.001 (0.002) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

19 Cyanides as CN 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

20 Anionic Detergents

0.2 (1.0) mg/l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

21 Mineral Oil 0.1 (0.03) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 22 Cadmium as Cd 0.003 (NR) mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.05) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25 Lead as Pb 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 26 Manganese as Mn 0.1 (0.3) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 0.3 0.01 27 Iron as Fe 0.3 (NR) mg/l 0.13 0.18 0.27 0.5 28 Chromium as Cr+6 0.05 (NR) mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 29 Selenium as Se 0.01(NR) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

30 Zinc as Zn 5 (15) mg/l 0.27 0.06 0.07 0.12 31 Aluminum as Al 0.03 (0.2) mg/l 0.04 0.06 0.05 0.18 32 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (NR) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 33 Pesticides Absent mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent 34 E. Coil Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

35 Total Coliforms 10 MPN/100 ml <2 <2 <2 <2




TABLE-3.7.3

SURFACE WATER QUALITY

Sr. No Parameters Units SW1 SW2

1 pH - 7.67 7.88 2 Colour Hazen 5 4

3 Conductivity µS/cm 572 563 4 TDS mg/l 375 370 5 DO mg/l 5.9 5.7 6 BOD mg/l <3 <3

7 COD mg/l 20 40 8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 165 165 9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 200 205 10 Calcium as Ca2+ mg/l 32 34 11 Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/l 20.7 19.4

12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 34.0 31.2 13 Residual free Chlorine mg/l <0.2 <0.2 14 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l <0.1 <0.1 15 Sulphates as SO4

2- mg/l 30.3 25.0 16 Fluorides as F- mg/l 0.5 0.4 17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 1.0 1.5

18 Sodium as Na mg/l 52.3 50.9 19 Potassium as K mg/l 3.2 2.5 20 Total Boron as B mg/l 0.13 0.13 21 Phenolic Compound as C6H5OH mg/l <0.001 <0.001 22 Cyanide as CN- mg/l <0.02 <0.02

23 Oil and Grease mg/l <1.0 <1.0 24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.01 <0.01 25 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 26 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.01 <0.01 27 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01

28 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.13 0.24 29 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l <0.05 <0.05 30 Selenium as Se mg/l <0.01 <0.01 31 Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.02 0.04 32 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.05 0.09

33 Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 34 SAR - 1.77 1.72 35 Insecticides mg/l Absent Absent 36 Anionic detergents as MBAS mg/l <0.1 <0.1 37 Total Coliforms MNP/100ml 10 8




3.8 Noise Level Survey

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise in general is sound which is composed of many frequency components of various types of loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of an average human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and universally accepted scale is the A weighted Scale which is measured as dB (A). This is more suitable for audible range of 20 to 20,000 Hz. The scale has been designed to weigh various components of noise according to the response of a human ear.

The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

• Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously varying in loudness;

• The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and

• The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive landuse, which

determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The environmental impact assessment of noise from the existing plant, construction activity, and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels, and assess the impact of the total noise generated by the mine operations around it.

3.8.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major noise generating sources in the area. Noise at different noise generating sources has been identified based on the activities in the village area, ambient noise due to industries and traffic and the noise at sensitive areas like hospitals and schools.

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at eight

locations in the study area. The noise levels at each location were recorded for 24 hours. The environment setting of each noise monitoring location is given in Table-

3.8.1 and shown in Figure-3.8.1.




TABLE-3.8.1

DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Location

Code Location Distance

(Kms) Direction Zone

N1 Mine Area -- -- Industrial

N2 Kirni 4.5 W Rural / Residential

N3 Near Telgul 5.2 NW Rural / Residential

N4 Muthur 4.8 N Rural / Residential

N5 Dewan Tegnur 4.2 NE Rural / Residential

N6 Taranhalli 1.0 E Rural / Residential

N7 Shahabad 1.7 SE Rural / Residential

N8 Tonsanhalli 0.5 SW Rural / Residential

3.8.2 Method of Monitoring

Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the locations covered in 10 km radius of the study area.

3.8.3 Presentation of Results

The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at eight locations during winter season. The parameters are analyzed for Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. These results are tabulated in Table-3.8.2.

TABLE-3.8.2

NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA

Code Location L10 L50 L90 Leq Lday Lnight Ldn

N1 Mine Area 47.3 43.6 40.0 44.5 45.1 41.9 48.9

N2 Kirni 49.6 45.8 42.3 46.7 47.3 44.3 51.3

N3 Near Telgul 48.8 45.2 41.5 46.1 46.6 43.6 50.6

N4 Muthur 49.1 45.5 41.8 46.4 46.9 43.9 50.9

N5 Dewan Tegnur 48.6 44.7 40.9 45.7 46.7 42.8 50.0

N6 Taranhalli 47.9 44.2 40.6 45.1 47.6 44.4 51.4

N7 Shahabad 52.5 48.9 45.2 49.8 50.3 47.2 54.2

N8 Tonsanhalli 49.6 45.8 42.3 46.7 45.6 42.7 49.7

a) Day time Noise Levels (Lday)

The day time noise levels at all the locations are observed to be within the range of 45.1 to 50.3 dB (A). The minimum noise level was observed to be 45.1 dB (A) at Mine area (N1) and maximum noise level was observed to be 50.3 dB (A) at Shahabad (N7). b) Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)

The night time noise levels at all the locations were found to be in the range of 41.9 to 47.2 dB (A). The minimum night time noise level was observed to be 41.9 dB (A) at Mine area (N1) and maximum night time noise level was observed to be 47.2 dB (A) at Shahabad (N7).




FIGURE-3.8.1

NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS




3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies

3.9.1 Introduction

The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), the Ramsar Convention, and the Convention on Migratory Species (CMS) recognize Environmental Impact Assessment (IA) as an important decision making tool to help plan and implement development with biodiversity “in mind.” The Conventions require Signatories (“Parties”) to apply EIA. According to the International Association for Impact Assessment (IAIA), Impact Assessment provides opportunities to ensure that biodiversity values are recognized and taken into account in decision-making. Importantly, this involves a participatory approach with people who might be affected by a proposal. The main aim of Conservation of Biodiversity is to ensure “No Net Loss” of any biological species whether big or small. The biodiversity-related Conventions are based on the premise that further loss of biodiversity is unacceptable. Biodiversity must be conserved to ensure it survives, continuing to provide services, values and benefits for current and future generations. The following approach has been chosen by the IAIA to help achieve ‘no net loss’ of biodiversity: • Avoidance of irreversible loss of biodiversity. • Seeking alternative solutions to minimize biodiversity losses. • Use of mitigation to restore biodiversity resources. • Compensation for unavoidable loss by providing substitutes of at least similar

biodiversity value. • Looking for opportunities for enhancement. This approach can be called “positive planning for biodiversity.” It helps achieve no net loss by ensuring the safety and survival of Rare or Endangered or Endemic or Threatened (REET) species. This positive approach has been chosen by the JP limestone mine Shahabad, Gulbarga; Karnataka.

3.9.2 Terrestrial Ecological Studies 3.9.2.1 Objectives of Ecological Study

The objectives of the present study are intended to: • Generate baseline data from field observations from various terrestrial and

aquatic ecosystems; • Compare the data so generated with authentic past records to understand

changes; and • Characterize the environmental components like land, water, flora and fauna.

3.9.2.2 Methods Adopted for the Study

To accomplish the above objectives, a general ecological survey covering an area of 10-km radius from mine lease boundary. For the study purpose, mine lease area in considered as core zone and 10 km boundary from ML area is considered as buffer zone.




• Reconnaissance survey for selection of sampling sites in and around plant site on the basis of meteorological conditions;

• Generation of primary data to understand baseline ecological status, important floristic elements;

• Generation of primary data to understand baseline fauna structure; and • Collection of secondary data from Forest Working Plan and Gazetteers.

3.9.2.3 Criteria Adopted for Selection of Sampling Locations

Reconnaissance survey was conducted to list plant species on the basis of following criteria: � Near plant site; � Downwind direction of the plant site; and � Upwind direction of the plant area.

1. Floristic Composition Primary Survey The details of biological environment including flora and fauna have been collected from various Government agencies to establish the biological environmental conditions within the buffer zone limits. There are no forests in this study area. It is all covered with dry cultivation land and tillage. Further this region, including the mining area is devoid of any thick vegetation except scattered thorny bushes and open scrub. Due to poor rain fall of the area, the natural vegetation is sparse and thorny. The ML area consists of private land, which is mostly agriculture land. Therefore, there exists no specific flora & fauna within the ML area. There are small scrubs and trees in the area. The mine lease area is totally denuded with limited presence of neem trees (Azadirachta indica) and sporadic presence of proposis juliflora –Sarkar Thumma or Vilayati babul was found. Also the presence of the stray weeds was also denuded.

Collection of primary data was carried out through field survey on forest and rare and endangered species, endemic species, ethno- botanical aspects, medicinal plants, major & minor forest produce, afforestation/social forestry. There are no rare and endangered species, important zones, endemic species, and medical plants in this area. There exist no forests in the area. The afforestation proposed in the ML area is furnished under the mitigation measures for land use.

Methodology for Primary Data Collection

Preparing a general checklist of all plants encountered in the study area. This would indicate the biodiversity for wild and cultivated plants.

o Determining the bird population of migratory and local birds by taking 10 random readings at every location;

o Observing mammals, amphibians and reptiles, noting their calls, droppings, burrows, pugmarks and other signs;




o Effects on status and/or quality of growth on plants and any symptoms like defoliation, deformities, chlorosis, necrosis, warping, reduced vigour and infection by parasites and attacks by predator insects were noticed;

o Local inhabitants were interviewed for uses of plants and animals and to get ethnobiological data.

TABLE-3.9.1

TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sr. No. Name of Village Distance (Km) Direction

T1 Mine Lease Area (core area) -- -- T2 Hire Nandur 9.0 km N T3 Dewan Tegnur 4.2 km NE T4 Kadehalli 9.0 km SW T5 Kirni 4.5 km W

Study area map showing terrestrial ecological locations is shown in Figure-3.9.1

3.9.3 Identification of Local Protected Species

As per Botanical Survey of India records and available published literature pertaining to the study area and current detailed study of project site, no threatened, endangered and rare plant species were observed from the study area.

3.9.4 Details of Forest Areas & Protected Areas

There are no reserved / protected forests within the 10 km radius from proposed mine lease boundary.

Many pockets of the land have been kept fallow for long gestation of time; Mesquite is a good coppice even when felled, it shoots sprout green branches and for fuel wood sources – Prosopis juliflora is grown to provide fuel, and other agrarian uses. Common is “Mesquite or Vilayati babul or Sarkar Thumma”

Protected Areas

There is no presence of national parks, sanctuary, biosphere reserves, Reserves, conservation reserve, community reserves etc., in the study area within 10 km radial distance from the boundary of mining lease area, and its locations, clearly shown on 1:50,000 scale map. There are no “Tiger and Elephant Reserves/nor any community reserves in the study area”.




FIGURE-3.9.1

TERRESTRIAL AND AQUATIC ECOLOGICAL LOCATIONS




3.9.5 Enumeration of the Flora and Fauna in the Primary Survey The detailed enumeration of the core flora and fauna are listed in the Table-

3.9.2 and Table-3.9.3, and similarly flora and fauna of the buffer zone are listed in the following Tables–3.9.6 and Table-3.9.7 respectively.

TABLE-3.9.2

LIST OF FLORA OBSERVED IN THE CORE ZONE

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name Family

Trees

1 Acacia nilotica Babul Mimosaceae 2 Azadirachta indica Spinous Kino Tree Phyllanthaceae 3 Prosopis juliflora Vilayati Babul/ Sarkar

Thumma Mimosaceae

4 Ipomea pres caprae Railway weed Convolvulaceae Grasses

5 Achyranthes aspera Prickly Chaff flower Amaranthaceae 6 Zizyphus jujuba Ber Rhamnaceae

The following are the list of the faunal species recorded in the core zone of the study area.

TABLE-3.9.3

LIST OF FAUNAL SPECIES RECORDED IN CORE AREA

Sr. No

Scientific Name Common Name Conservation Status as per Indian Wildlife

(Protection), Act, 1972

1 Corvus splendens House crow Sch-V 2 Columbia livia Rock Pigeon Sch-V 3 Oriolus oriolus Indian Oriole Sch-IV 4 Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy Myna Sch-IV

5 Acridotheres tristis Common myna Sch-IV 6 Ploceus philippinus Weaver bird Sch-IV 7 Passer domesticus House Sparrow Sch-IV 8 Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher Sch-IV 9 Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret Sch-IV

10 Ardeola grayii Pond Heron Sch-IV 11 Egretta garzetta Little Egret Sch-IV Reptiles 1 Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Sch-IV Amphibians 1 Rana hexadactyla Frog Sch-IV

2 Rana tigrina Bull frog Sch-IV Mammals 1 Funambulus palmarum Three Striped Squirrel Sch-IV 2 Herpestes edwardsii Common mongoose Sch-IV 3 Lepus nigricollis Indian Hare Sch-IV

Upon detailed botanical enumeration of the study area, the following species were recorded. In the buffer zone of the study area as listed in Table-3.9.4.




TABLE-3.9.4

LIST OF THE FLORA OF THE BUFFER ZONE OF THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name Family Name

Trees 1 Acacia auriculiformis Australian Acacia Mimosaceae 2 Acacia nilotica Babul Mimosaceae 3 Acacia chundra Chundra Mimosaceae 4 Vitex negundo Nirgundi Verbenaceae 5 Acacia ferrugenia Lakkigida Mimosaceae

6 Ailanthus excelsa Kudrebevu/ Mahanimb Meliaceae 7 Albizzia lebbeck Bage Mimosaceae 8 Anogeissus latifolia Dindiga Combretaceae 9 Annona reticulate Rampal Annonaceae 11 Azadirachta indica Neem/Bevu Meliaceae

12 Butea monosperma Muthuga/Palash Fabaceae 13 Citrus sp Nimbe Rutaceae 14 Ficus benghalensis Ala Moraceae 15 Ficus religiosa Arali Moraceae 16 Dodonea viscoa Banarike Sapindaceae

17 Chloroxylon swietenia Mashiwal Meliaceae 18 Emblica officinalis Nelli/Amla Euphorbiaceae 19 Gliricidia sepium Gobbaraa Gidda Papilionaceae 20 Holoptelia integrifolia Tapasi/Nemalinara Urticaceae 21 Mangifera indica Mavu/Mango Anacardiaceae

22 Pongamia pinnata Karanj Fabaceae 23 Proposis juliflora Simejali/Mesquite/Thum

ma Mimosaceae

24 Syzgium cumnii Neralu/Jamun Myrtaceae 25 Wrightia tinctoria Hali Apocynaceae 26 Tamarindus indica Hunise Cesalpinaceae 27 Phoenix dactylifera Ichalu; Khajur Palmae

28 Samanea saman Rain tree Ceasalpinaceae Shrubs, Herbs, Climbers and Grasses

29 Calotropis gigantea Ekkada gidda Asclepidiaceae 30 Cymbopogon coloratus Poaceae Bodha grass 31 Euphorbia tirucalli Kalli Euphorbiaceae

32 Cassia auriculata Thangadi Casealpinaceae 33 Lantana camara Lantana Verbenaceae 34 Musa paradisica Banana Musaceae 35 Optunia dillenii Cactaceae Papakalli 36 Zizyphus jujuba Ber/Bare hannu Rhamnaceae

37 Tridax procumbens Mexican daisy Asteraceae 38 Argemone mexicana Mexican poppy Papaveraceae 39 Cynodon dactylon Nut grass Poaceae 40 Cajanus cajan Red Gram Fabaceae 41 Oryza sativa Rice /Paddy Poaceae/Graminae 42 Decalepsis hamiltonii ** Makali beru/ Vagani

beru Apocynaceae

43 Andropogon sorghum Sorghum/Jowar Graminae 44 Bambusa bamboos Bans Poaceae

** - Endangered and Endemic Climber.

Critically Endangered & Endemic Climber:

Decalepsis hamiltionii – Makali beru/ Vagani beru was observed growing abutting an abandoned house in Taranhalli village, Shahbad. It is endemic and endangered climber. Ethno-botanically it is an medicinal plant, widely used as a natural herbal coolant.




3.9.6 Fauna

The species observed in the buffer zone were admixture of those also present in the core zone also. The enumerated list of the fauna is listed in the Table-3.9.5.

TABLE-3.9.5 FAUNA FROM BUFFER ZONE

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name Conservation as per WPA (1972)

AVES

1 Dicrurus adsimilis Black drongo Sch-IV 2 Pycnonotus cafer Red-Vented bulbul Sch-IV 3 Gallinago gallinago Common snipe Sch-IV

4 Ocyceros birostris Common grey Horn bill Sch-IV 5 Caprimulgus asiaticus Common Indian Nightjar Sch-IV 6 Alcedo atthis Small blue king fisher Sch-IV 7 Streptopelia chinensis Spotted dove Sch-IV 8 Bulbulcus ibis Cattle-Egret Sch-IV

9 Acridotheres ginginianus Bank Myna Sch-IV 10 Passer domesticus House sparrow Sch-IV 11 Bubo bubo Eurasian eagle owl Sch-IV 12 Anas crecca Cotton teal Sch-IV 13 Tyto alba Barn Owl Sch-IV 14 Corvus macrorhynchos Indian Jungle crow Sch-IV

15 Gallus sonneratii Grey jungle Fowl Sch-II 16 Gallus gallus Red jungle Fowl Sch-IV 17 Columbia livia Blue-rock pigeon Sch-V 18 Egretta gularis Indian Roof Heron Sch-IV 19 Dendrocopos mahrattensis Yellow fronted wood Pecker Sch-IV

20 Egretta garzetta Little Egret Sch-IV 21 Corvus splendens House crow Sch-V 22 Eudynamys scolopaeca Koel Sch-IV 23 Lonchura punctulata Spotted Munia Sch-IV

23 Acridotheres tristis Indian myna Sch-IV

24 Sarkidiornis melanotos Comb duck Sch-IV 25 Coracias benghalensis Blue jay (Roller)/Indian Roller Sch-IV 26 Dendrocygna javanica Lesser whistling Teal Sch-IV 27 Merops orientalis Small Green Bee-eater Sch-IV 28 Motacilla cinerea Grey wagtail Sch-IV

29 Motacilla maderaspatens Large pied wag-tail Sch-IV 30 Sacrogyps calvus King vulture Sch-IV 31 Anthene brama Spotted Owl Sch-IV 32 Hirundo smithi Wire-tailed Swallow Sch-IV 33 Himantopus himantopus Black Winged Stilts Sch-IV 34 Lanus vittatus Bay-backed Shrike Sch-IV 35 Francolinus pondicerianus Grey Francolin Sch-IV 36 Anas clypeata Shovellar Sch-IV 37 Psittacula krameri Rose-Ringed Parakeet Sch-IV 38 Perdicula asiatica Jungle Bush Quail Sch-IV

39 Coturnix coromandelica Rain Quail Sch-IV 40 Ploceus philippinus Baya weaver bird Sch-IV 41 Fulica atra Eurasian Coot Sch-IV 42 Himantopus himantopus Black-winged Stilt Sch-IV 43 Apus affinis House Swift Sch-IV 44 Vanelleus indicus Red –Wattled Lapwing Sch-IV

Mammals 1 Macaca mullata Rhesus Macaque (Red faced

Monkey) Sch-II




Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name Conservation as per WPA (1972)

AVES

2 Presbytis entellus Common Langur Sch-II 4 Bandicota bengalensis Field Rat Sch-V

3 Funambulus pennanti Five Striped Squirrel Sch-V 4 Lepus nigricololis Indian hare Sch-IV 5 Vulpes bengalensis Indian Fox Sch-II 6 Herpestes edwardsii Common mongoose Sch-II Reptiles 1 Naja naja Cobra-Naja tripadians Sch-II

2 Varanus benghalensis Monitor Lizard Sch-II 3 Ptyas mucosus Rat snake Sch-II 3 Vipera russellii Russel’s viper Sch-II 4 Bungarus caeruleus The common krait Sch-II

Authenticated list of flora and fauna enclosed as Annexure-X. 3.9.7 Aquatic Ecology 3.9.7.1 Introduction

Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development. The task of preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of both national and global significance since there are no boundaries to the propagation of anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline information and undertake effective management plan. So the objective of aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows: 1. To characterize water bodies like fresh waters; 2. To understand their present biological status; 3. To characterize water bodies with the help of biota; 4. To understand the impact of industrial and urbanization activities; and 5. To suggest recommendations to counter adverse impacts, if any on the

ecosystem. 6. To meet these objectives following methods were followed: 7. Generating data by actual field sampling and analysis in these areas through

field visits during study period; 8. Discussion with local people to get the information for aquatic plants and

aquatic animals; and 9. To fulfill these objectives and to understand the present status of aquatic

ecosystem, samples were collected from different fresh water system (rivers and canals) under investigation.

In order to get a clear picture and to assess the various parameters of water, two aquatic ecological sampling locations were identified for sampling. Samples were collected during the study period. The sampling locations are presented in Table-

3.9.6 and shown in Figure-3.9.1.




TABLE-3.9.6

DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Locations Distance

(km)

Direction

AE-1 Kagina river at Kadehalli 9.1 SW

AE-2 Kagina river near Gola khurd 4.2 SE 3.9.7.2 Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies

Plankton Study The biological species specific for a particular environmental conditions are the best indicators of environmental quality. This includes different biological species such as phytoplankton, zooplankton and bacteria.

Diatoms, desmids and dinophyceaen members are indicative of clean water conditions. Increasing dominance of diatoms, ciliates, flagellates, chlorophycean and cyanophycean species indicates progressively increasing trophic conditions. Presence of Euglenophyceae indicates high eutrophic conditions. Planktonic rotifers are usually more abundant in fresh water than estuarine waters. It is believed that when crustacean and insect out number other groups the situation reflects the enriched organic conditions of water. Thus, of certain organisms help in classifying water body in trophic levels on knowing its physico chemical characteristics. 15 species of phyto-plankton samples were collected plankton samples were collected by using plankton net. The filamentous algae and debris were avoided by filtering through the plankton net. The collected sample was condensed to 100 ml by filtration and the samples were preserved using pinch of Rose Bengal and 10 ml of 4% formaldehyde solution.

For the measurement of frequencies of various forms of Phytoplankton and Zooplankton, one drop of the sedimented plankton was mounted on a micro-slide. The plankton forms were identified up to species level and expressed as organisms per milliliter of the sample.

Zooplankton: About 8 zooplankton species are recorded from the three aquatic sampling locations. Daphnia, Nauplius larva are the predominant animal species in studied samples.

3.9.7.3 Collection of Secondary Data on Fishery Resource in Study Area

There are no fishery resources in the study area as it does not contain any perennial water resources.




TABLE-3.9.7

LIST OF PHYTOPLANKTON SPECIES RECORDED FROM STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Family Algal Species

1 Bascillariophyceae Navicula sp.

Nitzschia sp.

Diatoma sp.

Synedra sp.

2 Chlorophyceae Ankistrodesmus sp.

Planktosphaeria sp.

Chlorococcum sp.

Cosmarium sp.

Chlamydomonas sp.

Chollera sp.

Oscillatoria sp.

3 Cyanophyceae Calothrix sp.

Merismopedia sp.

Anacystis sp.

4 Euglenophyceae Euglena sp.

TABLE-3.9.8

LIST OF ZOOPLANKTON SPECIES RECORDED FROM STUDY AREA

Group Species

Copepoda Cyclops sp

Nauplius larva

Cladocera Daphnia sp.

Ceriodaphnia sp.

Diaphnosoma

Rotifera Brachionus sp.

Keratella sp.

Trichocera sp

Conclusion

There are no endangered plants and animals found in the study area, except the presence of Scheduled III and IV, animals which are listed in the Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.

Also as cited there are no endangered or rare or threatened plants found in the study area.

3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

The demographic and socio-economic conditions prevailing in the 10 km radius of the proposed project area Taranhalli, Shahabad villages in Chitapur tehsil, and Gulbarga district of Karnataka” is analyzed. The socio-economic data forms the basis for developing a suitable enterprise social responsibility plan to address the needs of the population. The project proponent is committed to take up the socio-economic development initiatives not only to minimize the negative impact on the population and also to




improve the socio-economic status of population living in 10 km radius of the mine as its sustained effort as part of corporate social responsibility.

3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes primary survey review of published secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks-2011 and Primary Census Abstract of Census-2011) with respect to population, density, household size, sex ratio, social stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure for 10 km radius study area.

3.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile-2011 The village wise demographic data of Shahabad (NAC) Notified area Committee/ Council, Shahabad (CMC) City Municipal Council, Bhankur (OG) Out growth, Wadi (TMC) Town municipal council and 34 villages falling within 10 km radius of the project site as per the 2011 census is given in Annexure-XI. The salient features of the demographic and socio-economic conditions are analyzed and described in the following sections.

3.10.3 Demography As per the 2001 census the total population of the study area is 1,44,575. The population reported as per the 2011 census is 182109. Overall 25.96% decennial growth is reported in the study area. The growth rate of population in the study area comparatively reported more than the growth rate of state (Karnataka 15.5). The reason for more growth rate is Shahabad (NAC) Notified area committee/council, Shahabad (CMC) City Municipal Council, Bhankur (OG) out growth, Wadi (TMC) Town Municipal Council urban areas are falling within the study area. The urban population in the study area is 99250 and 55% of the total population. • Distribution of Population

As per 2011 census, the study area consists of 1,82,109 persons inhabited in study area. The distribution of population in the study area is shown in Table-3.10.1.

TABLE-3.10.1

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION

Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km

No. of Households 926 17361 16045 34332 Male Population 2446 45296 43776 91518 Female Population 2526 45277 42788 90591 Total Population 4972 90573 86564 182109 Male Population (0-6 years) 349 6285 6265 12899 Female Population (0-6 years) 402 5995 5920 12317 Total Population (0-6 years) 751 12280 12185 25216

% of 0-6 years population 15.10 13.56 14.08 13.85 Average Household Size 5.37 5.22 5.40 5.30





% of males to the total population 49.20 50.01 50.57 50.25 % of females to the total population 50.80 49.99 49.43 49.75 Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males) 1033 1000 977 990 Density 202 409 277 326

Source: District Census Hand Book–2011

• Average Household Size

The study area has a household size of 5.30 as per 2011 census, which has decreased from 5.81 in 2001. This is mainly due to population control measures, health awareness programs. • Population Density

The density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of

326 persons per km2 (PP km2) as per 2011 census reports. As per the census the density of population of Gulbarga district is 234 and Karnataka state is 319.

The density of population in the study area comparatively reported more than the density of district and state, this is mainly due to 55% of urban population in the study area. • Sex Ratio

The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about 50.25% and females to 49.75% of the total population as per 2011 census records. The study area on an average has 990 females per 1000 males as per 2011 census reports. In comparison to the Gulbarga and Karnataka sex ratio (Gulbarga district 971, Karnataka state 979) the study area has recorded higher sex ratio. The sex ratio in the study area indirectly reveals certain sociological and cultural aspects in relation with female births.

3.10.4 Social Structure In the study area, as per 2011 census, 32.20% of the population belongs to Scheduled Castes (SC) and 1.63% to Scheduled Tribes (ST). In comparasion with state proportion of SC and ST Population in the study area is less than district (Gulbarga district SC 25.3% and ST 2.5%). Overall the data of social stratification reveals that the SC and ST% to population is more than 33%, The SC and ST community are marginalized and they are at considered at low level of social strata and calls for a special attention in Social Impact Management Plan for improving their socio-economic status apart from preservation and protection of their art, culture and traditional rights of livelihood.

The distribution of population by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.




TABLE-3.10.2

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE


Schedule caste 1379 26294 30968 58641 % To the total population 27.74 29.03 35.77 32.20

Schedule Tribes 4 1049 1922 2975 % To the total population 0.08 1.16 2.22 1.63

Total SC and ST population 1383 27343 32890 61616 % To total population 27.82 30.19 38.00 33.83 Total population 4972 90573 86564 182109

Source: District Census Hand Book –2011

3.10.5 Literacy Levels The data of study area reveals that literacy rate of 64.87% as per 2011 census, which is found to be less than the state rate of literacy (Karnataka 75.4%). The distribution of literate and literacy rate in the study area is given in Table-

3.10.3.

TABLE-3.10.3

DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES


Male population 2446 45296 43776 91518

Female population 2526 45277 42788 90591

Total population 4972 90573 86564 182109

Male population (0-6 years) 349 6285 6265 12899

Female population (0-6 years) 402 5995 5920 12317

Total population (0-6 years) 751 12280 12185 25216

Total population above 7 years 4221 78293 74379 156893

Male literates (7+ years) 1376 30388 26863 58627

Female literates (7+ Years) 955 23164 19038 43157

Total literates (7+ Years) 2331 53552 45901 101784

Male literacy rate (%) to the total literates 59.03

56.74 58.52 57.60

Female literacy rate (%) to the total literates 40.97

43.26 41.48 42.40

Average male literacy to the total population (%)

32.60 38.81 36.12 37.37

Average female literacy to the total population (%)

22.62 29.59 25.60 27.51

Total literacy rate (%) to the total population

55.22 68.40 61.71 64.87

Source: District Census Hand Book –2011 The percentage of male literates to the total literates of the study area works out to be 57.60%. The percentage of female literates to the total literates, which is an important indicator for social change, is observed to be 42.40% in the study area as per 2011 census records.




3.10.6 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of residents of work participation rate in the study area is studied with reference to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 10 categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industry; and other than household industry, construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and other services. The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other non-workers who do not fall under the above categories. Total work participation in the project study areas is 37.80% and the non-workers constitute 62.20% of the total population respectively. In comparison with study area work participation rate is less than the Gulbarga district. (Gulbarga district is 42.4%) The distribution of workers by occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant population. The main workers to the total workers are 76.35% and the marginal workers constitute to 23.65% to the total workers. The occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table-3.10.4.

TABLE-3.10.4

OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE


Total Population 4972 90573 86564 182109

Total workers 2002 33131 33701 68834 Work participation rate (%) 40.27 36.58 38.93 37.80 Total main workers 1498 25452 25604 52554

% of main workers to total workers 74.83 76.82 75.97 76.35 Marginal workers 504 7679 8097 16280 % of marginal workers to total workers 25.17 23.18 24.03 23.65 Non-workers 2970 57442 52863 113275 % of non-workers to total population 59.73 63.42 61.07 62.20

Source: District Census Hand Book-2011


Chapter-4 Impact Assessment


4.0 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

4.1 Introduction

“Environmental Impact” can be defined as any alteration of environmental conditions or creation of a new set of environmental conditions, adverse or beneficial, caused or induced by the action or set of proposed actions under consideration.

This chapter incorporates both qualitative and quantitative description of various environmental impacts from the proposed open cast limestone mine. The open cast mining operations in general cause environmental degradation and if adequate control measures are not taken to prevent/mitigate the adverse environmental impacts, these operations may cause irreversible damage to the eco-system. The environmental parameters most commonly affected by mining activities are:

• Topography; • Land use; • Climate; • Drainage; • Air quality; • Water resources and quality; • Noise levels and ground vibrations; • Soil quality; • Flora and fauna; • Landuse pattern; and • Socio-economic conditions. The proposed limestone mining project is likely to create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:

• During the mine developmental phase which may be regarded as temporary

or short term; and • During the operation phase which would have long term effects.

The mine development and operation of the proposed lime stone mine comprises various activities each of which may have an impact on some or other environmental parameters. Various impacts during the mine development and operation phase on the environment parameters have been studied to estimate the impact on the environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the subsequent sections.

4.2 Impacts during Mine Developmental Phase

This includes the following activities related to leveling of site, construction of access road, crushing plant and other related structures and equipment.




4.2.1 Impact on Land use

At mine development stage no major changes are anticipated. The structures like crushing plant, screening plant, and administration office and service center are proposed for lime stone mining activity. Due to the mining activity the land use will be converted to industrial use.

4.2.2 Impact on Soil

The mine development activities will result in loss of topsoil to some extent in the crushing plant, administrative buildings and other facilities in mine lease area. In addition to that preparation of limestone excavation area also leads to loss of topsoil in this region. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking so that, it can be used for green belt development. Apart from localized impacts at the crushing plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the surrounding area is anticipated.

4.2.3 Impact on Air Quality

During mine developmental phase, particulate matter will be the main pollutant, which would be generated from the site developmental activities and vehicular movement on the road. Further, concentration of NOx and CO may also slightly increase due to increased vehicular traffic movement. However, the increase in ambient concentrations of air quality will be negligible and reversible. As most of the construction equipment will be mobile, the emissions are likely to be fugitive. The dust generated will also be fugitive in nature, which can be controlled by suitable mitigation measures like sprinkling of water.

The impacts will be localized in nature and the areas outside the project boundary are not likely to have any adverse impact with respect to ambient air quality.

4.2.4 Impact on Water Resources and Quality

Further, the wastewater generation during the mine development period will be basically from the sanitary units provided for the workers, which will be of very less in quantity. Hence, there will not be any impact on the water regime due to the wastewater generated from toilets and other bathing facilities.

4.2.5 Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the mine development phase are vehicular traffic, mine development equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, pumps, compressors, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation of these equipment will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near source. These noises will be generated mostly within the mine boundary and will be transient in nature. Due to proposed green belt all around the periphery of the mine boundary, these noises will be attenuated to a large extent and are not likely to have any significant impact on the nearby villages.




4.2.6 Impact on Ecology

The layout of the proposed facilities has been designed away from major tree bearing areas, so that most of the new facilities are located within the mine lease boundary for operational convenience and to minimize disturbance to the community. The construction of crushing plant, office complex, central work shop involves cutting of tree species and removal herbaceous plants. Maximum care will be taken to minimize the tree cutting and removal of herbaceous flora is a temporary and reversible hence, there is no major impact on ecology during mine development phase.

4.2.7 Demography and Socio-Economics

The impact of the proposed lime stone mine project would begin to be felt with the start-up of the construction activities. The non-workers constitute about 62.20% of total population in 10 km radius study area. Some of them will be available for employment in the proposed mining project. As the labourers are generally un-skilled, the locals would get opportunities for employment during construction activities. The peak labour force required during the mine developmental period is estimated to be about 143 nos. It is estimated that at least 2/3 of the labour force will be sourced from the local area. There will be some migration of labour force from outside the study area during mine development phase, which may put some pressure on the local settlements and resources. However, this impact is envisaged to be marginal and a temporary phenomenon.

In addition to the opportunity of getting employment as construction labourers, the local population would also have employment opportunities in related service activities like petty commercial establishments, small contracts/sub-contracts and supply of construction materials for buildings and ancillary infrastructures etc. Consequently, this will contribute to economic upliftment of the area.

4.3 Impacts During Operational Phase

4.3.1 Impact On Topography

The applied area is a relatively flat ground with slight undulation and very gentle slope towards East to South East. The surface elevation within the applied area varies from 460 m above MSL towards North-West to 400 m MSL towards South-East.

4.3.2 Impact on Land Use

The mining lease area considered for exploitation is comprised of grey, purple and siliceous limestone formation bearing area. It is envisaged that about 593.311 ha will be disturbed by the mining activity during the life of the deposit. Out of this during first 5 years of operations about 48 ha area will be disturbed, which includes the mined out void, area under exploitation, position of various benches quarry roads, dump/back filled area. At the end of 5 years about 8.50 ha area will be used for top soil storage.




There shall also be no waste overburden generation. The overburden generated is black cotton soil which shall be simultaneously used in afforestation by proper stacking and improving the quality by mulching and plantation with leguminous and grass variety of plants. These abandoned open pit workings filled with rain water act as recharge wells, thus minimizing the runoff losses and conserve them under the ground water system. A bund of 7.5 m bottom width, 3 m top width and 3 m height will be formed on safety zone of entire applied lease area and this bund will be stabilized with plantation, which will act as protective measure. In addition safety zone on either sides of village road covering an area of 3.50 ha will be maintained as green belt. Backfilling with generated top soil will be carried out on worked-out benches from second five years block period to conceptual period.

During mine developmental phase landuse will be as given in Table-4.1. Post mining land use details of lease as per conceptual plan is given below in Table-

4.2. TABLE-4.1

LANDUSE DURING PRE, OPERATION & CONCEPTUAL STAGE

Sr. No. Particulars Land use (ha.)

Present Plan Period Conceptual Period

1 Area for Mining - 48.00 593.311 2 Topsoil storage - 8.50 - 3 Mineral storage - 7.00 7.000 4 Statutory Buildings - 10.00 10.000 5 Area for Roads - 01.00 2.500 6 7.5 m safety zone - 15.00 15.000 7 10 m safety zone for village

roads - 3.50 3.500

8 Area for future use/others 631.311 538.311 - Total 631.311 631.311 631.311

Source: Mine Plan

TABLE-4.2

POST MINING LAND USE DETAILS

Sr. No.

Particulars Area (ha)

Means of Rehabilitation

1 Area for mining 593.311 Backfilling and plantation – 85.00 ha Rain water harvesting pits – 508.311 ha

2 Area for mineral storage 7.000 Plantation 3 Statutory buildings 10.000 Will be kept for watch and ward 4 Area for roads 2.500 Plantation 5 7.5 m safety zone 15.000 Bund with plantation 6 10 m safety zone for village roads 3.500 Plantation/greenbelt

Total 631.311

Source: Mine Plan




4.3.3 Impact on Climate 4.3.3.1 Temperature

The average monthly minimum and maximum temperatures are monitored at the mine lease area and also analyzed based on the data from nearest IMD station at Gulbarga. The trends of temperatures show a regular cyclic pattern. The temperature pattern indicates a regional behavior and is thus not likely to be affected by proposed mining activity. Any local temperature hikes due to operation of mining machinery and blasting will be moderated by the proposed green belt programme. • Rainfall

The average annual rainfall in the region is 752.8 mm as per IMD data of Gulbarga. Any changes in the pattern of rainfall will be on regional scale because of cumulative reasons. The operation of mine is not expected to have any adverse effect on the rainfall pattern of the area.

• Wind Speed

The wind speeds of any area depend on the existence of elevations and depressions in the region. The proposed mining activity will have minor change in topography and creation of structures in project area and its immediate vicinity. Due to change in the topography of the project area minor variations are envisaged at local level. • Humidity

The relative humidity in the area is not likely to change because of the mine developmental activities, as it will not cause any changes in the prevailing temperatures and rainfall of the region.

4.3.3.2 Drainage

Drainage pattern as per the mine plan is given below. There are seasonal streams originating from the applied lease area and flows eastern direction. Run-off is observed from these nallahs is mainly at eastern boundary. Some of which joins a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad town and finally reaches Kagina river. Kagina river is tributary of Bhima river located at a distance of 5 km in east of applied lease area, which is a dry river only active during monsoon season. Bhima river is a tributary of river Krishna passes at a distance of 9 km in south direction.

4.4 Impact on Air Quality

The air pollution impact of lime stone mine depends on the intensity of ore extraction operations, mode of transport and mode of screening of ore. The intensity of operation is directly related to the rate of production of ore from mining. Production details are reported in Chapter-2. Similarly, drills, shovels, dumpers of different capacities are engaged mainly for extracting and




transporting the ore from the mining areas. The details of the equipment are given in Chapter-2 and the sources are discussed below. • Drilling Drilling will be done by blast holes by 115 mm dia drill and generated muck pile, will be excavated by the shovels with bucket capacities of 6.5 m3 and 4.3 m3 shovels. Drilling operations are mainly carried out during day time. • Blasting

Blasting will be done using ANFO mixture along with 25% booster slurry explosives. Air pollutants generated during blasting will be in the form of chemical gases and particulate matter. The gases and particulate matter generated during blasting does not significantly contribute any air pollution as it will be instantaneous and intermittent. Blasting will be carried out during daytime only and is avoided during high windy periods and during night times.

• Transportation of Ore

The entire limestone excavated from this mine will be fed to Jaypee Shahabad cement plant. The mine is situated at a distance of about 2.5 km of the cement plant by road. The limestone will be transported to the plant by closed belt conveyor system. The blasted mass is loaded by three hydraulic excavator each of 4.5 cum bucket capacity. Limestone will be crushed at crusher in mine and transported to the plant by closed belt conveyor system to cement plant which is located only 4.5 km away.

• Ore Loading

The ore after crushing and sizing at in pit crushing plant is brought to stock yard which ultimately transported to the plant & the remaining material is stacked in the stock pile by a movable stacker placed in stock yard. Water sprinkling is done regularly to contain the PM in the stock yards. Of the above sources, drilling, blasting, excavation and transportation through dumper and crushing plant are the major sources, which are of significance. Water sprinkling arrangements at the appropriate places will be provided to contain the emissions. The proposed lime stone mining activities are likely to contribute additional Particulate Matter (PM), dust from area sources and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and hydrocarbons from automobile exhaust. The existing baseline concentrations of pollutants are within the limits prescribed by CPCB for industrial/mixed areas and for rural/residential areas. Air pollution sources at the proposed mining site can be classified into three categories, viz., area sources, line sources and instantaneous point sources. Extraction of lime stone by various activities in mining area is considered as an




area source. Transportation of ore from mining area to the crusher is considered as line source. Blasting is usually done by deep holes. Blasting in the proposed mining will be conducted through deep blast holes and blasting will be carried out during day time. From the mine, ore will be transported by 40/60 T capacity rear dump trucks to the crushing plant. PM and NOx emissions are envisaged during blasting and transportation operations. But these will be kept under control by monitoring regularly, the emissions from exhaust and by sprinkling of water on haul roads etc. Even though blasting generates NOx it will be instantaneous and intermittent. Also, NOx emission from the vehicular movement on surface would be intermittent and getting dispersed quickly. A large quantity of dust will be wind borne due to blasting but due to the e proposed plantation around the mine the spread of dust will be arrested. The sources of pollutants are given in Table-4.3.

TABLE-4.3

SOURCES OF POLLUTANTS

Sr. No Source Type of Pollutant

1 Mining activity, (drilling, blasting, loading & crushing)

PM, NOx

2 Transport of Over Burden (OB) waste for dumping/backfill and ore to sorting/sizing

PM

3 Dumping of waste PM

4 Sorting of ore and loading PM

5 Transportation of sorted ore PM, NOx

4.4.1 Impacts of Mining Activities 4.4.1.1 Impacts from Area Sources

As discussed in Chapter-2, the area sources include mine pit and its activities covering drilling, blasting, hauling and loading /unloading. The dust emissions from the above areas will be fugitive in nature and maximum during summer season (when the wind velocities are likely to be high) and almost nil during the monsoon season. The dust emissions are likely to be confined to the mine premises only. Drilling will be done with latest drill machines thus the likelihood of dust emission from drilling activities is negligible. The gaseous emissions like oxides of nitrogen from the blasting activity will be instantaneous and will prevail for shorter duration. Hence, the impact due to blasting will be instantaneous and there will not be any long-term adverse impacts. Similarly, the excavator operations, loading and unloading operations will cause dust generation. The dust generated will be confined to the area of operation of




the excavator and will not have any adverse impact on the community. The gaseous emissions from these operations will also be negligible and limited to the mine.

4.4.1.2 Line Sources and their Impact

Transportation of ore/waste from the mine pit to the primary crusher unit/ dump site are covered under line source. It can be observed that the contribution from the dumper movement on the haul road will be confined to the mine area only and will not have any adverse impact on the community. The dumper movement will cause emission of particulate matter. However, this will be fugitive in nature and will be restricted to the proximity of the haul road only. Further, the truck wheels are likely to cause pollution in terms of dust. However, with the inception of truck washing system, this is going to be minimized.

4.4.1.3 Impact due to Instantaneous Emission Sources and their Impact

Blasting is the major source of instantaneous emission sources. Blasting in the mining will be conducted through deep blast holes and will be carried out during day time only.

PM and NOx emissions are envisaged during these blasting operations. But, these are kept under control by sprinkling of water on haul roads and monitoring regularly the emissions from exhaust etc. The large quantity of dust will be wind borne due to blasting but due to the proposed greenbelt around the mine, the spread of dust will be arrested. Even though blasting generates NOx, it will be instantaneous and intermittent.

4.4.1.4 Fugitive Emissions

The fugitive emissions are mainly generated while loading the raw material at mine face, transportation of ore and while unloading. Automatic water sprinklers will be installed at crusher hopper and pressurized water is sprinkled. The dust on haul roads will be suppressed through regular water sprinkling. The fugitive emission generated during drilling is controlled by using dust collectors with vacuum suction to the drilling machines.

Another source of fugitive emissions would be stacked overburden dumps in the ML area. Fugitive emissions are likely to be generated from these dumps due to the wind. The fugitive emissions will be controlled by means of sprinklers and development of greenbelt, which will also serve to arrest the soil erosion. With the proposed control measures, the fugitive emissions will be insignificant in terms of their impact on environment.




4.4.1.5 Air Pollution Impact Prediction through Modelling

a. Aermod View

AERMOD is an air dispersion-modeling package, which seamlessly incorporates the popular USEPA Models, ISCST3, ISC-PRIME and AERMOD into one interface without any modifications to the models. These models are used extensively to assess pollution concentration and deposition from a wide variety of sources.

b. Aermod Model

The AMS/EPA REGULATORY MODEL (AERMOD) was specially designed to support the Environmental Regulatory Modeling Programs. AERMOD is a regulatory steady – state-modeling system with three separate components; � AERMOD (AERMIC Dispersion Model); � AERMAP (AERMOD Terrain Preprocessor); and � AERMET (AERMOD) Meteorological Preprocessor. The AERMOD model includes a wide range of options for modeling air quality impacts of pollution sources, making it popular choice among the modeling community for a variety of applications. AERMOD requires two types of meteorological data files, a file containing surface scalar parameters and a file containing vertical profiles. These two files are provided by AERMET meteorological preprocessor program. � PRIME building downwash algorithms based on the ISC – PRIME model have

been added to the AERMOD model; � Use of arrays for data storage; � Incorporation of EVENT processing for analyzing short-term source culpability; � Explicit treatment of multiple – year meteorological data files and the annual

average; and � Options to specify emissions that vary by season, hour-of-day and day-of-

week. Deposition algorithms have been implemented in the AERMOD model – results can be output for concentration, total deposition flux, dry deposition flux, and / or wet deposition flux. The model contains algorithms for modeling the effects of settling and removal of large particulates and for modeling the effects of precipitation scavenging for gases or particulates.

c. Aermet

In order to conduct a refined air dispersion modeling project using the AERMOD short-term air quality dispersion model, it is necessary to process the meteorological data representative of the study area being modeled. The collected meteorological data is not always in the format supported by the model, therefore the meteorological data needs to be pre-processed using AERMET program. The AERMET program is a meteorological preprocessor, which prepares hourly surface data and upper air data for use in the AERMOD air quality dispersion




model. AERMET is designed to allow future enhancements to process other types of data and to compute boundary layer parameters with different algorithms. AERMET processes meteorological data in three stages and from this process two files are generated for use with the AERMOD model. A surface file of hourly boundary layer parameters estimates a profile file of multiple-level observations of wind speed, wind direction, temperature and standard deviation of the fluctuating wind components.

d. Application of AERMOD

AERMOD model with the following options has been employed to predict the cumulative ground level concentrations due to emissions from the proposed mining activity. � All terrain dispersion parameters are considered;

� Predictions have been carried out to estimate concentration values over radial

distance of 10 km around the project area;

� Uniform polar receptor network has been considered;

� Emission rates from the sources were considered as constant during the entire

period;

� The ground level concentrations computed without any consideration of decay

coefficient;

� Calm winds recorded during the study period were also taken into

consideration;

� 24 hourly mean ground level concentrations were estimated using the entire

meteorological data collected during the study period; and

� The study area is used to represent the graphical output of the GLC’s using the

terrain processor.

e. Meteorological Data

The hourly meteorological data recorded at site is converted to the mean hourly meteorological data as specified by CPCB and the same has been used in the model. Hourly mixing heights are taken from the “Atlas of Hourly Mixing Height and Assimilative Capacity of Atmosphere in India” published by India meteorological department, 2008, New Delhi.

The meteorological data recorded during study period continuously on wind speed, wind direction, temperature etc., have been processed to extract the data required for simulation by AERMOD using AERMET.

f. Emission Factors Considered in Model

The modelling has been carried to predict the impacts of the mining operations with a total production capacity of 7 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) on the existing environment, using emission factors arrived for the worst case i.e. without control measures. The emission factor has been estimated for 9 no. of




sources for various mining operations and is given in Table-4.4. The graphical representation of ground level concentrations (GLCs) is shown in Figure-4.1

TABLE-4.4

EMISSION FACTORS FOR MINING OPERATIONS USED FOR MODELLING

Activities / Operations Units Emission Factors

Top soil removal by ripper gm/m 0.623 Drilling gm/sec 0.720

Blasting gm/sec 2.190 Loading to tippers excavator gm/sec 0.005 Dumper/ tipper unloding OB gm/sec 0.005 Bulldozing of OB gm/sec 0.025

Loading ore to dumper/ tipper gm/sec 0.012 Dumper/ tipper unloading ore gm/sec 0.018 Wheel generated dust on haul road

gm/m 0.560

Source: SP Benerjee, Minetech, Volume - 27

4.4.1.6 Presentation of Results

The model simulations have been carried out for pre monsoon season. For the short-term simulations, the ground level concentrations (GLCs) were estimated around 440 receptors to obtain an optimum description of variations in concentrations over the site in 10 km radius covering 16 directions. The maximum incremental ground level concentrations and resultant concentrations for PM are given in Table-4.5.

TABLE-4.5

PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT TERM INCREMENTAL GLC’S

Pollutant Incremental Level (At

ML boundary without

control measures)

µg/m3

Direction

PM10 8.3 W A perusal of the table above covered under each activity reveals that there will be a marginal increase in terms of dust load. However, it can be observed that the resultant ambient air quality after considering the point source emissions, fugitive / area source emissions and line source emissions are well below the limits as per national ambient air quality standards, 2009 and the area has sufficient carrying capacity to accommodate the industrial development.

4.4.1.7 Air Pollution Management

Mitigation measures suggested for air pollution controls are based on the baseline ambient air quality of the area. From the point of view of maintenance of an acceptable ambient air quality in the region, it is desirable that air quality is monitored on a regular basis to check compliance of standards as prescribed by CPCB. In case of non-compliance, appropriate mitigation measures need to be checked.




FIGURE-4.1

PREDICTED INCREMENTAL GLCS




4.4.2 Air Pollution Management

Mitigative measures suggested for air pollution controls are based on the baseline ambient air quality of the area. From the point of view of maintenance of an acceptable ambient air quality in the region, it is desirable that air quality is monitored on a regular basis to check compliance of standards as prescribed by CPCB. In case of non-compliance, appropriate mitigation measures need to be checked. � Measures to Prevent Generation and Dispersal of Dust Dust particles, which are normally generated during mining operations, become air borne, thus leading to increase in PM level in the ambient air. In the proposed mining activity with adequate control measures would be adopted during mining operations. The control measures to be adopted are: • Blacktop paved roads will be made within the mine boundary to contain dust

generation due to traffic on haul roads; • Water will be sprayed on the ore during crushing and loading; • The plantation on backfilled area, Safety zone along the ML boundary and

Safety zone of village road will be carried out; • The waste rock will be dumped by giving less aerial lift and grading can be

done by gradual dozing. This will help in reduction of dust generation on the waste dumps while dumping the waste;

• Water sprays will be used on coarse ore stock piles for reducing dust generated during fall of ore from the conveyors.

• Overall Impact due to the Mine

As discussed above under each activity, there will be increase in terms of dust load and gaseous emissions. However, it can be stated that these incremental contributions will be confined to the proposed mining area and its surroundings and will not have any adverse impact on the outside community. Further, the mitigation measures as described in the end of this Chapter will further bring down these concentrations making the proposed mining activities more environmental friendly.

4.5 Impact on Water Resources and Quality

The water is required in mining operations for water sprinkling on haul roads and feeder roads, service center, dust suppression at loading yard, auto shop, greenbelt development and domestic purposes in mine.

4.5.1 Impact on Water Resources

Water required to cater the need for drinking purpose, dust suppression at faces and on haul roads, cleaning and washing of HEME, crushing plant and plantation etc. The requirement of water for mining is about 125 m3/day. The source of water supply will be from existing allocation of 6180 m3/day water from Kagina river and water reservoir developed in the ML area. The mine water will be used for spray on haul roads, plantation, cleaning and washing of machineries and toilets etc.




No wastewater will be generated after water spraying at faces and along haul roads, for dust suppression. The water gets absorbed by the ground, percolates through porous strata or run down, or gets evaporated. Only the limited quantity of water will be used under high pressure for washing and cleaning of HEME in the work shop/garage. The oil & grease traps will be provided to arrest any petroleum products. This water will be used for plantation, therefore, no recycling of water required in the mine.

Considering the availability of surface water in the area vis-à-vis the consumption, the impact of withdrawal of surface water for various uses mentioned above will be insignificant. � Water regime

� Surface Water

There are seasonal nallahs originating from the applied lease area and flows towards eastern direction. Run-off is observed from these nallahs is mainly at eastern boundary. Some of which joins a water body i.e. Nandana Halla near Shahabad own and finally reaches Kagina river. Kagina river is tributary of Bhima river located at a distance of 5 km in east of applied lease area, which is a dry river only active during monsoon season. Bhima river is a tributary of river Krishna passes at a distance of 9 km in south direction. The general drainage pattern of the area is a combination of dendritic and parallel.

� Underground Drainage The ground water in the Shahabad area as observed in the existing wells in an around the leasehold area varies from 40 to 45 m from the general ground level. However, during summer season the water table further goes down.

� The effect of large scale mining on hydrological conditions The mining operations are not expected to have any impact on the ground water in the area. As the mining operations will not touch the ground water table during its life.

4.5.2 Impact on Mining on Surface Water

The general drainage pattern of the area is a combination of dendritic and parallel. The source of water supply will be from existing allocation of water from Kagina river and water reservoir developed in the ML area. The open cast mining operations may cause surface water pollution due to:

• Wash off from dumps; and • Soil erosion. If proper control measures are not taken suspended matter from the mine and the wash off from dumps is likely to flow down into the natural drainage system. Adequate drainage systems will be planned in the mining, service center for allowing the water to flow in the pre determined path. The drainage system will




be designed in such a way even to meet excess rainfall. No water will be allowed to flow across the waste dumps. However, few check dams will be constructed to arrest wash out from the waste dumps during rainy season. All along the mine roads drainage will be provided and benches will be properly sloped so as to avoid stagnation of water. There are no surface bodies likely to be affected adversely by mining operations. No considerable wastewater is also likely to be released or generated. So there will be no impact of solid waste on water quality. There are no industrial effluents as no beneficiation/washing of mineral is envisaged. Limestone and/or rejects in the deposit do not contain any harmful ingredient and as such there is no scope of toxic or chemical contamination of water due to mining operation.

During first five years of mining operations the mining lease area of the western & eastern part will be under exploitation. In order to protect the mine working from the surface rainwater, a protective bund followed by a small drainage will be provided along the mine working to check the inflow of the water into the working area. However, adequate control measures also will be taken to reduce adverse impact on surface rainwater due to mining operations. The mining activities confined to the level well above the ground water table. Thus the mining operation will not affect the hydrological condition of the area. As per the conceptual mine plan, most of the land excavated during mining activity would be retained as water reservoir which will serve as recharge pits, water for plantation and as a source of water supply for public use depending upon rainfall. The balance open area will be backfilled and reclaimed by plantation. The drainage pattern of the lease area shows only few streams of first and second order originate in the lease area. The catchment areas of these streams originating inside the lease area is small and these streams carry limited surface runoff during the rains. The accumulated rain water in the mining pit will be stored in the mine pit after meeting the water requirement for dust suppression and green belt development. The drainage map of Shahabad mine lease area is given in Figure–4.2. With the above measures no adverse impact is envisaged on the surface water quality in proposed limestone mine.

4.5.3 Impact on Ground Water Quality

Ground water pollution may take place only if the waste rock dumps and mineral stockpiles contain chemical substances. These chemicals get leached by the precipitation water and percolate to the ground water table thus polluting it. Any nearby wells or other sources of water can be rendered unfit for drinking and even for industrial use. This is not the case with this deposit as the limestone deposit or waste dump does not contain any harmful ingredients, which could leach down to the water table. Adequate control measures also will be taken to reduce adverse impact on surface rainwater due to mining operations.




The mining activities are confined to the level well above the ground water table. Thus the mining operation will not affect the hydrological conditions of the area. The water balance is shown in Table-4.6 and water balance diagram is shown in Figure-4.3.

TABLE-4.6

WATER BALANCE

Sr. No Particulars Quantity (m3/day)

1 Drinking 10

2 Dust Suppression 60

3 Mine Operation 30

4 Greenbelt Development 25

Total 125 Source: Mine Plan

Since this part of the country is generally arid, the ground water accumulations are very scant. Ground water is being taped by bore wells and tube wells. The yield of the wells in the area ranges from 65 to 160 cu m / hr. Ground water in the area occurs under water table conditions in the semi confined to unconfined aquifers. The transmissivity and permeability of the limestone is very poor. The limestone acts as a barrier and hence there is no hydraulic continuity between the limestone and the country rock. The ultimate working depth will be upto 370 m RL and from the general observation the ground water level is below 350 m RL. Hence no ground water will be encountered during the mine life. Hence, there will not be any further adverse impact on the ground water resource due to proposed mining.




FIGURE-4.2

DRAINAGE MAP OF ML AREA

N

SCALE

1 0 1 2 Km

10 KM

17°

15'

76° 55' 77° 00'76° 50'

76° 55' 77° 00'76° 50'

17°

10'

17°

05'

17°

15'

17°

10'

17°

05'

10 KM

Plant Area

River/Nala Township Area

LEGEND

ML Area

Nandana H

alia

KA

GN

A R

IV

ER

BHIMA RIVER




`

FIGURE-4.3

WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

Mine Pit

Mining Operations

Dust Suppression

Greenbelt

125

30 60 25

All Values are in m3/day

Potable Water

10

Septic Tank/Sock Pit

8




4.5.4 Rain Water Harvesting The ML area is gently sloping ground almost barren without much of vegetation growth. The monsoon water gets drained off through the natural seasonal nallahs to the nearby tanks. Hence the descent of rainwater from the ML area has to be controlled so as not to form new drainage channel. Suitable garland drains will be made at the high wall side of the ultimate mining areas, so that the precipitated water flows out of the mining area in to the natural seasonal nallahs existing within ML area. Water flow in the seasonal nallahs are observed only immediately after a rainfall, most of which is under runoff. Construction of check dams enhances water percolation to the ground water system thus reducing the wastage due to runoff and evaporations, as this being an arid climate. The black cotton soil overlying the limestone bed forms the overburden which shall be used in afforestation work. Therefore, there is no necessity of creating separate waste or reject dumps. The rejects to be generated from ROM are very minimal. The mineral rejects produced, if any, will be blended suitably as per the cement plant requirement. There is no waste generated during mining operations. These abandoned open pit workings filled with rain water act as recharge wells, thus minimizing the runoff losses and conserve them under the ground water system. Thus a raise in water table is expected due to the water harvesting measures like erection of check dams and partial open pits left after the abandonment which shall be filled with water. The typical rain water structures are shown in Figure-4.4 to Figure-4.6.




FIGURE-4.4

RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK




FIGURE-4.5

RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR WORKSHOP




FIGURE-4.6

RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR PAVED ROAD THROUGH RECHARGE TRENCH

4.6 Impact due to Noise & Ground Vibrations

Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, noise, dust and fumes are the deleterious effects of blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave in the ground, which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance to human occupants. It causes major damages to the pit configuration too. When an explosive charge is fired inside the blast hole, it is instantly converted into hot gases, which exert intense pressure on the blasthole walls. A high intensity shock wave propagate radially in all directions and cause the rock particles to oscillate. This oscillation is felt as ground vibration. The proposed mining operations using deep hole drilling and blasting using delay detonators are bound to produce ground vibrations. Blasting, in addition to easing the hard strata, generates ground vibrations and instantaneous noise. Ground vibration from mine blasting is expressed by amplitude, frequency and duration of blast. The variables, which influence ground vibrations are controllable and non-controllable. The non-controllable variables include general surface terrain, type and depth of overburden and wind. Similarly, the controllable variables include type of explosives, charge per delay, delay interval, direction of blast progression, burden, spacing and specific charge and coupling ratio. The oscillation of rock particles is called Particle Velocity and its maximum value is called Peak Particle Velocity (PPV), which is measured in millimeter per second. The standards for safe limit of PPV are established by Director General of Mines Safety for safe level criteria through Circular No. 7 dated 29/8/1997. The safe level criteria PPV as mentioned in Circular No. 7 of DGMS is presented in Table-

4.7.




TABLE-4.7

PERMISSIBLE PEAK PARTICLE VELOCITY

All values are given in mm/sec

Type of Structure Dominant Excitation Frequency

<8 Hz 8 – 25 Hz >25 Hz

A] Buildings/structures not belonging to the owner

Domestic houses/structures (Kuchha brick and cement) 5 10 15 Industrial Buildings (RCC and framed structures 10 20 25 Objects of historical importance and sensitive structures 2 5 10 A] Buildings belonging to the owner with limited life span Domestic houses/structures (Kuccha brick and cement) 10 15 25

Industrial buildings (RCC & framed structures) 15 25 50 Source: DGMS Circular No. 7 dated 29/08/1997

As the distance increases the PPV value is likely to reduce. The ground vibrations generated by blasting during the mining operations will be well within the standards prescribed by DGMS by controlled blasting. Ground vibrations are not likely to affect the structures in the vicinity of mine lease area. By adopting controlled blasting, the problems will be greatly minimized at the mine. The impacts are also minimized by choosing proper detonating system, optimizing total charge and charge/delay. Noiseless trunk delays to minimize the noise due to air blast, non-electric (NONEL) system of blasting for true bottom hole initiation, muffling mats to arrest the dust and fly rock will be adopted. Hence, the impact due to ground vibration will be significantly reduced.

4.6.1 Noise Generated Due to Blasting

115 mm dia wagon drills with compressors are used to drill blast holes in limestone. For a bench height of 9 m, depth of holes is maintained at 3 m burden and 5 m spacing for better fragmentation and optimum powder factor. The explosive charge per hole is about 80% of ANFO mixture along with 20% booster slurry explosives. Thus low density ANFO mixtures along with booster slurries are used for blasting, with a stemming column of 1.0 m. Limestone generated per hole is 3.0 x 5 x 11 x 0.80 x 2.5 = 330 tonnes. The blast holes are fired with Elect detonators & Detonation Fuse. This system allows only one hole i.e., a fraction of the total explosives to blast at a point of time which minimizes boulder generation, frequent toe occurrence, fly rock generation. In this mine blasting is done twice or thrice in a week. With an explosive of 300 kg/ delay the peak particle velocity in thus limestone mine are observed to be less than 5 mm / sec. at a distance of 500 m. Thus vibration levels from the designated blasting pattern are expected to be well below the permissible limits. The peak particle velocity (PPV) depends upon charge per delay and frequency delay interval and type of explosive. In this mine, millisecond delay elect detonators & detonation fuse are used for initiation of blast holes which minimizes boulder generation, frequent toe occurrence, fly rock generation. This system allows only one hole i.e., a fraction of the total explosives to blast at a point of




time. This produces less vibration in the ground, avoid fly rocks during blasting, thus eliminating any hazard to structures nearby, if any, The noise levels during blasting operations are likely to be in the range of 120 to 130 dB (A) at the blast site. The noise levels tend to decrease with distance. As the blasting is likely to last maximum for 5 minutes depending on the charge, the noise levels over this time would be instantaneous and short in duration and hence impact on noise levels from blasting are not envisaged.

4.6.3 Noise Generated due to Excavation and Transportation

The noise generated during excavation, loading and transportation activities due to the proposed mining are presented in Table-4.8.

TABLE-4.8

NOISE DUE TO EXCAVATION/LOADING/TRANSPORTATION

Sr. No

Name of the Equipment Noise at Source dB(A)

1 Crusher (out side crusher cabin at drive end of LC) 100

2 Crusher (inside cabin, door open) 86

3 Near Drill machine-1(when hole collar drilling) 104

4 Drill machine-1(after 3 m drilling) 103

5 Near Dumper (at full race) 92

6 Terex Dumper (at full race) 94

7 Near Haul road while dumpers are plying 88

8 Dozer (when dozing) 102

9 Hydraulic shovel 85

4.6.4 Noise due to Crushing, Screening and Loading Plant

The average noise levels generated due to proposed crushing activities will be about 88.5 dB (A) which is below the 8 hr exposure limit of 90 dB (A). The crushers in the mine will be housed in a shed. Hence, noise will be contained. The average noise generated due to screening activities will be about 96.5 dB(A) which is above the 8 hr exposure limit of 90 dB(A). The average noise due to the loading activity will be about 75.8 dB (A) which is well below the 8 hr exposure limit of 90 dB (A). Workers in the high noise generating areas will be provided earplugs/earmuffs as safety precaution.

4.6.5 Noise Dispersion from the Mine

The noise generation from the mining activities will be from various sources, which may originate from various locations. For the purpose of noise dispersion, it is assumed that all the noise generating sources from the quarry as one source. Hence, total noise from drilling, excavation, transportation, loading, and crushing will be equal to 99.4 dB (A). The dispersion of this noise is computed by using the model.




• Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation

For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient from the source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path. For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation: Lp2 = Lp1 - 20 Log (r2 / r1) .....(1) Where Lp2 and Lp1 area Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at distances r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be determined at various locations by the following equation.

Lp (total) = 10 Log (10(Lp1/10) + 10 (Lp2/10) + 10 (Lp3/10)……) ..… (2)

Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources. Based on the above equations a user-friendly model has been developed. The

details of the model are as follows:

∗ Maximum number of sources is limited to 200; ∗ Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source; ∗ Model is designed to take flat or undulating terrain; ∗ Coordinates of the sources in meters; ∗ Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model; ∗ Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and ∗ Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been

incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured Leq levels.

4.6.6 Input to the Model Major noise sources as cumulative noise source has been identified and noise levels expected are presented in Table-4.8. From the noise sources in the proposed mine, co-ordinates have been defined with respect to the northern part of the mine. For convenience of the contours, 100 m grid scale is chosen. An attempt has been made to predict the noise levels at the boundary of the proposed mining site. Coordinates X and Y are taken as input to the model is correlated with grid size and scale (1:100 m). Thus, the center of the mining area is defined as 0,0 coordinates. The input to the model has been taken as the cumulative noise of noise generating sources.




4.6.7 Noise Impact Analysis on Community

The contours and the noise levels obtained by modeling are presented in Figure-

4.7. From the contours, it is observed that higher noise levels will be confined to work zone areas only. It can be seen that noise levels get diffused rapidly with distance. The predicted noise levels indicate that the noise contours of 35 dB(A) occurs within the mine lease area only at about 500-600 m from the center of the source. Thus, there will not be an increment to the community ambient noise levels.

In summary, it can be stated that only the noise impact due to mining on working environment is relatively significant (equivalent levels are but likely to be within limits), while the noise impact on community is insignificant.

4.7 Impact on Soil

The environmental impact of the proposed mining activities on topsoil are based on the nature of activities, extent of area covered and associated aspects of environmental concern. The dust generated during blasting operations, loading and unloading operations and vehicular movements normally constitute heavier particles that would readily settle on very small areas within the mining area itself. On account of various associated activities there is increase in vehicular traffic on these areas. These may generate additional particulate emissions. Generation of particulate emissions is therefore, of primary concern.

Another important aspect is soil erosion on the hill slopes, if not managed properly. Soil erosion may also be accelerated on areas where the overburden from the ore excavation operation is dumped. The proposed plantation of the number of exotic species will be an effective insulation of nearby areas to arrest soil erosion on the hill slopes.

� Temporary Storage and Utilization of Top Soil

The limestone in the area is either outcropping or concealed beneath the soil cover varying from 1 to 4 m with average thickness of 2.35 m. The quantity of 1.128 million cum of soil has been estimated to be handled during plan period. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety covering an area of 5.0 ha and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease covering and area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the preserved top soil will be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as per requirement.




FIGURE-4.7

NOISE DISPERSION TREND AROUND THE MINE

-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000

-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000

-1000

-800

-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

-1000

-800

-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000




During post mining period the total mined out area will be about 593.311 ha which will be rehabilitated by backfilling and plantation in an area of 85 ha and remaining 508.311 ha will be used as rain water harvesting pits. The balance area out of 631.311 ha : plantation in 13 ha (7 ha – Area of mineral storage, 2,5 ha area for roads, 3.5 ha – 10 m safety zone for village roads), 15 ha of 7.5 m safety zone will be converted into bund with plantation and the balance 10 ha of statutory building will be kept for watch and ward. � Waste Dumps Stabilization and Vegetation

The black cotton soil overlying the limestone bed forms the overburden waste which shall be used in afforestation work. There is no generation of waste during the plan period expect top soil. A part of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 Ha. and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease covering an area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the preserved top soil shall be utilized for backfilling on worked-out benches as per requirement. During second five years block and upto conceptual period a part of the generated topsoil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 10.00 ha., extending towards Northern side of the applied lease area and remaining part of the generated top soil and handled top soil preserved during first five years plan period will be utilized for backfilling on worked-out benches. The generation of top soil quantity, building-up of bund on safety zone, storage of top soil, backfilling on worked-out benches and plantation during the plan period and for the next successive block of 5 year upto the conceptual period is given in Table-4.9.




TABLE-4.9

TOP SOIL GENERATION AND UTILISATION

Year Top soil

quantity (m3)

Bund on safety zone

(bottom width 7.5 m, top width 3 m &

height 3 m)

Storage of topsoil Backfilling on

worked-out benches

Plantation

Bund Backfilling Safety zone

area for

village roads

Utilization

of topsoil

(m3)

Proposed

length of

bund (m)

Topsoil

quantity

(m3)

Area

for

storage (ha)

Topsoil

quantity

(m3)

Backfilling

area (ha)

Area

(ha)

No. of

plants

Area

(ha)

No. of

plants

Area

(ha)

No. of

plants

1st 5 years block 1.128 0.105 6670 1.023* 8.50 - - 5.0 5000 - - - - 2nd 5 years block 1.440 0.105 6650 - - 2.358 15.00 5.0 5000 12.0 12000 1.00 1000 3rd 5 years block 1.440 0.105 6650 - - 1.335 9.00 5.0 5000 8.0 8000 1.00 1000 4th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 1.00 1000 5th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 0.50 500 6th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 - - 7th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 - -

8th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 - - 9th 5 years block 1.440 - - - - 1.440 9.00 - - 8.0 8000 - - 10th 5 years block upto conceptual period

1.292 - - - - 1.292 7.00 - - 7.0 7000 - -

Total 13.940 0.315 19970 1.023 8.50 13.940 85.00 15.0 15000 75.0 75000 3.50 3500

* The preserved topsoil of 1.023 m3 will be utilized for backfilling on worked-out benches during second five years block period.




� Control Erosion/Sedimentation Of Water Courses

As permanent preventive measures in the mining area, the following proposals are made to control the quality of water flowing out of the mining area during monsoon. • Construction of masonry check dams and gully plugs; • Providing retention walls at the foot of the soil dump; and • Afforestation will be carried out every year. Water garland are created to regulate and drain the rain water from the quarry and direct its course away from the dumping areas. This will help in preventing the silt to be carried to the water bodies and fields. Soil dumps shall not be exposed to the surface run-off, rain water passing from the higher elevations enrooted and joining the water courses. Earthen banks are provided on the non-operating side of soil dumps to arrest wash off. It is proposed to do mulching and simultaneously planting leguminous plants and grasses, to arrest and prevent erosion and sliding of dump slopes and also to improve the quality. The afforestation will be at the rate of 1000 saplings/ha. The rain water within the pit will be collected in the sump for the deposition of solid particles. Once the suspended particles are deposited it will be pumped out for dust suppression, gardening and afforestation purpose. Toe wall / Rubble walls of total length over 500 m, height 1.50 m and a width of 1.50 m, will be constructed all along the toe end of the soil and reject waste dumps. Garland drains will be provided in between these two toe walls and also this area in between shall be afforested garland drains are proposed to prevent the rain water entering in to the pit. The general dimensions are over 1000 m length, 0.5 to 1 m width & 0.5 m depth.

The valley portions within the ML area are provided with check dams with filter beds to allow settling of solid particles. A typical design of which is given below. Above these check dams, gully checks will be erected to check the velocity of rainwater and reduce the silt volume in the check dams. These structures also aid in rain water harvesting.

The spacing between the dams can be calculated by multiplying the height of the check dam by the slope H:V or by dividing the slope %.




Creation of Water Reservoir in the abandoned workings will be done at the end of

the life of the mine for the worked out area of the pit as it would be beneficial to the environment and the human settlement to create a water reservoir and that such a reservoir can be maintained safely over the years. For this before the abandonment it is proposed that the top bench of the abandoned pit, after complete extraction of the ore, will be covered with top soil and afforested. This reservoir will also act as recharge well for rain water harvesting, thus reducing the surface runoff and evaporation losses and increasing the ground water potential. Pisciculture will also be considered in due course of time.

These channels and the dams shall be periodically desilted to maintain the

drainage operations, for discharging clean water into the surrounding environment. � Treatment and Disposal of Water from Mine

No water will be generated due to mining activities except rain water. The mining activity will not puncture the ground water table. A drainage system is proposed to be made to carry away the rain water of the catchments area surrounding the working. No pollution of this water is anticipated as neither the limestone nor the rejects there in contain any harmful ingredient, thereby not affecting the quality of water going downstream by mining operations.

4.8 Impact on Flora and Fauna

The baseline flora and fauna has been described in Section-3.8 of Chapter-3. Accordingly, there is no wildlife sanctuary and national parks in 15 km radius circle.

4.8.1 General Impacts

The major air pollutants envisaged from the projects are NOx and PM. The general impacts of these pollutants on vegetation have been studied by scientists. Most of the studies are carried out on laboratory conditions and on annual plants. There is great paucity of scientific data on tropical species and especially on forest species. However, the general impacts are as follows.




• Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

Two oxides of Nitrogen i.e. NO2 and NO [3:1 ratio] are collectively referred to as NOx. High temperature reactions in presence of air form NOx.

NOx absorbed by plants through stomata reacts with cell wall and forms HNO2 and HNO3, which is the cause of toxicity. The symptoms of injury include grey-green or light brown color, bleached or necrotic spots in interveinal areas which later form streaks.

The atmospheric concentrations normally do not reach a level sufficient to induce acute injury. The importance of NOx in the atmosphere lies in the fact that they form raw material for the formation of secondary pollutants like O3, smoke and Peroxy Acetyl Nitrate (PAN). NO and NO2 are known to cause eye and nasal irritation in the case of humans; NO2 at 25 ppm causes pulmonary discomfort. NO2 is known to get involved in the formation of free radicals. At critical concentration (which defers with nature, health and age of animals). NO2 is known to cause lung, edema, pulmonary congestion, obliterative bronchiolitis, Pneumonitis etc. The critical concentration in case of wild animals is not known. The existing and proposed activities are not likely to have any negative impacts on the vegetation, as the emission of NOx will be insignificant.

4.8.2 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

There is no generation of wastewater from mining operations. Water used for dust suppression along haulage roadways and at mining faces is not expected to generate any wastewater as it will percolate through ground and / or evaporate. The waste water generated due to the domestic activities will be only wastewater generation due to the mining operations. The wastewater is of the sewage quality and does not contain any heavy metals or toxic elements.

4.8.3 Treatment and Disposal of Water

Domestic waste water will be sent to soak pit; hence no impact of wastewater is envisaged from the mining.

4.8.4 Disturbance to Wildlife due to Mining

Mining activity consist of a number of operations that are source of noise. Noise from blasting is of high intensity but momentary while noise from mechanical equipment is lower in intensity but continuous. Blasting for removal of overburden will be carried out during the day time only so there is no disturbance at night due to blasting. The noise levels will be low because walls of mine pit act as barrier.




4.8.5 Impact on Mine Closure

With scientific and systematic mine closure; the adverse impacts of mining will cease to continue. The mine area will be suitably afforested and reclamation operations will be taken up in place. There would be positive impact on the forests and wildlife.

• Flora

The ML area is a agricultural land. There are no specific flora and fauna surrounding the ML area or even in the buffer zone and it is occupied by active dry agricultural fields as the rainfall is erratic. No forest cover is there. The impact assessment has shown that the incremental fugitive emission at mine lease boundary is about 16 µg/m3 and beyond 3.0 km it is insignificant. Therefore there shall be no adverse impact on the flora and fauna of the area. The impact on terrestrial ecology will be due to emission of gaseous pollutant like NOx. The pollutant at a very low dose acts as an atmospheric fertilizer for the vegetation. However at higher doses, they are injurious to both vegetation as well as animals. NOx may also contribute to formation of secondary pollutants like Ozone and Peroxy Acetyl Nitrate in certain weather conditions. Among the Oxides of Nitrogen, NO2 has been recognized as potent toxic pollutant due to its indirect impact on organisms and its role in photochemical smog cycle. The Phyto-toxic effect on NOx is expressed as chlorotic and necrotic symptoms on the leaf lamina, accompanied with reduction in growth and production. Plants are particularly susceptible to NOx pollution and their exponential phase of growth. It has been reported that plant growth reduction and necrosis occurs on exposure to 3 ppm of NO2 for 4 hr. The visible injury symptoms of NOx are irregular, white/brown lesion in between veins and near leaf margins.

In the proposed mining operations, NOx emissions are mainly due to burning of diesel in mining vehicles. As described in Chapter-3 on air quality, the low concentrations of NOx due to operation of the proposed mining operations will have insignificant impact on ambient air quality and NOx concentration will remain within the AAQ standards. Therefore, the impact of these emissions on the surrounding agro-ecosystem will be insignificant.

Extensive plantation comprising of pollutant resistant trees will be undertaken around the proposed mine site, which will serve not only as pollution sink but also as a noise barrier. It is expected that with the adoption of these mitigatory measures, the impact due to operation of the mine will be minimal on the terrestrial ecosystem.

• Fauna

The adverse impacts on fauna would be mainly due to:

∗ Human activity; ∗ Noise; ∗ Land degradation; and ∗ Deforestation.




The impact on the fauna of the buffer zone due to the mining activity will be marginal. The fauna is less in occurrence in the study area.

Even so, by restricting mining at any time to small areas, impact on fauna will be kept to the minimum. Moreover, progressive plantation with over a period of time will create conditions favourable for fauna.

4.8.6 Impact on Aquatic Ecology

All these streams are ephemeral in nature and get dry during summer. Check dams, garland drains, retaining walls all around the waste dumps will be provided to arrest the suspended solids generated due to soil erosion and from waste dumps. Further due to the plantation proposed on the backfilled area, and all along the boundary of ML area, there will be reduction in soil erosion. Hence, no impact is envisaged from the proposed mining operations on aquatic bodies around the proposed mine area.

4.9 Impact on Land use Pattern

4.9.1 Land use Pattern in Buffer Zone

No adverse impact is anticipated in land use of buffer zone due to the proposed mining operations, as all the concerned activities will be concentrated in the core zone only in ML areas.

4.9.2 Land use Pattern in Core Zone The active mining area will be biologically reclaimed to protect soil erosion at the abandoning stage of mine. Backfilling with generated top soil will be carried out on worked out benches from second five year block period to conceptual period. Plantation will be done on bond, backfilled area and safety zone of village road. Remaining worked out area will be converted into reservoir.

4.10 Impact on Socio-Economic Aspects

The proposed mining lease area is free from human settlement and all the villages are situated at a considerable distance from the mining area. However, the project would also produce some improvements in the socio-economic levels in the study area.

4.10.1 Impact on Population Growth

The proposed mining operations may have an impact on the population growth as it would provide considerable employment to the families in the nearby villages. About 50% employees from outside may take up jobs in the proposed mine and with migration of their families, an increase in the population is anticipated.

4.10.2 Impact on Civic Amenities, Educational and Heath Care Facilities

The proposed lime stone mining project will provide social benefits to the surrounding population in the form of roads, communication facilities,




transportation, marketing, banking, postal services, health facilities directly or indirectly. The civic amenities will be developed due to proposed mine.

4.10.3 Impact on Economic Aspects

The proposed mine will help to improving the financial resources of the surrounding population by way of petty trade and employment opportunities. The projects will encouraged the setting up of various utility services and petty trade benefiting around 143 people around the mining areas. Direct employment will also generate, besides indirect and ancillary employment. Local people will be given preference for employment under semi-skilled and un-skilled categories. Thus the people in and around the mine area indirectly will be benefited both socially and economically. The proposed mining activities will provide employment to persons of different skills and trades. The local population is the largest group among these employees. The employment potential ameliorates economic conditions of these families directly and provide employment to many other families indirectly who are involved in business and service oriented activities. This in-turn will improve the socio-economic conditions of the area.

4.10.4 Impact on Rehabilitation of Human Settlements The mining lease area is free from habitants; hence no control measures or rehabilitation is required.

4.11 Impact on Places of Tourist/Religious/Historical Importance

There are no places of historical importance in the near vicinity. Hence, no impact is anticipated on any place of historical importance due to mining operations.

4.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan

• Mined Out Land

The ML area has a flat topography with elevation of 460 m – 400 m RL. During first five years of mining operation total 48 ha. Of land will be disturbed due to mining. The details are given in below Table-4.10.

TABLE-4.10

DETAILS OF PROPOSED MINED OUT LAND

Year Mined out area at

the beginning (ha) Additional area

proposed during the

year (ha)

Total Area

Area Reclaimed &

Rehabilitated during the

year

Mined out area at the

end of the year

1 - 14.00 14.00 - 14.00 2 14.00 34.00 48.00 - 48.00

3 48.00 - 48.00 - 48.00 4 48.00 - 48.00 - 48.00 5 48.00 - 48.00 - 48.00

Source: Mine Plan




The details of year wise proposed plantation on safety zone/ bund during the plan period is given in Table-4.11.

TABLE-4.11

PROPOSED PLANTATION & BUND DETAILS

Period Bund Formation on

Safety Zone (m) Proposed Plantation

Year Location Name of

Species 1 1500 1.00 1000 Bund on

safety zone Neem, Jamun, Tamarind, Jali, Subabu and other species

2 5170 1.00 1000 3 - 1.00 1000 4 - 1.00 1000

5 - 1.00 1000

Total 6670 5.00 5000

Source: Mine Plan

• Mining Method

This will be an opencast, fully mechanized captive mine of JCCL. Mining will be carried out by conventional method adopting deep hole drilling and multi row deep hole blasting using milli second delay/ relay detonation system for loosening of material and the loosened material will be handled and transported by an excavator and dumper combination. The haul roads will be maintained at a gradient of not more than 1:25. The bench height will be 9 m. • Progressive Mine Closure Plan The mine plan has been designed for the progressive closure of the mine, with simultaneous reclamation and rehabilitation measures, such that after the cessation of mining operations, the reclamation and rehabilitation measures required are minimal. During plan period, out of the area ML area of 631.311 ha, 48 ha will be mined out area. The progressive mine closure plan was prepared and got approved by IBM, under which simultaneous reclamation measures of the land disturbed due to mining and allied activities are proposed.

Area put to use by the plan period will be 93 ha, at specified rate of Rs.25,000/ha. The financial assurance is Rs.23,25,000/-. As already stated there shall be no waste generation from the mine. The overburden present is black cotton soil which shall be removed in advance separately and stacked for a height not exceeding 3 m which shall be simultaneously reused in afforestation work after improving its quality. Considering the fact there shall be no waste generation and the worked out area may be retained as water reservoir in this water scarce area, and remaining area will be backfilled. By carrying out mining operations simultaneously in proposed blocks, where the grades of limestone varying with each other, a better blending of high grade limestone with that of low grade limestone is achieved to the required level for the cement manufacture. By adopting such methods, the low grades shaley limestone is utilized for cement manufacturing, which otherwise would have gone




as waste. Also the life of high grade limestone deposit is increased. Thus conservation of the national limestone mineral resources is achieved. The excavation made in the mineral zone cause voids during operation of the mine. Out of 50 m depth of limestone, it is proposed to excavate in part of the area upto 30 m depth during the plan period. Hence, it will not be possible to go for reclamation concurrent to mining operations. However from next 5 year block period onwards backfilling will be carried out on worked out benches with generated top soil and at the cessation of mining operation, water reservoir will be created, after taking precautions to fence-off the worked out area. Financial area closure plan is shown in the Chapter-2.


Chapter-5 Environment Management Plan


5.0 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

5.1 Introduction

The mining operations in proposed limestone mine need to be inter-twined with

judicious utilization of non-renewable resources and within the limits of

permissible assimilative capacity of the region. The assimilative capacity of the

region is the maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged into the

environment without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution,

dispersion and removal due to physico-chemical and biological treatment.

The Environment Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the region around the mining complex, hence it needs to be an all

encompassing plan for which the mining authorities, Government, regulatory

agencies like Central and State Pollution Control Boards, Indian Bureau of Mines

(IBM), etc. working in the region and more importantly the affected population of

the region need to extend their co-operation and contribution.

It has been anticipated that on the other hand that the region will not be affected

adversely with the proposed mining activity and will have new economic fillip for

the region as a whole. Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall

management plan at the regional level are elicited so as to improve the

supportive capacity of the region and also to preserve the assimilative capacity of

the receiving bodies.

The environmental attributes, which are likely to be affected in the region, are

land use, topography, water resources, soil, air quality, socio-economic status,

ecology and public health.

The Management Action Plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to

the extent possible, with the available and affordable technology, followed by

treatment measures before they are discharged. In addition to the mine specific

control measures, the proposed new mine establishment will follow the following

guidelines:

• Application of Low and Non Waste Technology (LNWT) in the mining process,

• Adoption of reuse and recycling technologies to reduce generation of wastes

and optimize the production cost of the mine, and

• Progressive land reclamation measures and overburden management along

with the production of lime stone.

It is to be appreciated that mining process is to a certain extent, an inevitable

destructive process, but the hazards are within measurable limits and can be

easily ameliorated to a significant extent.

The pollution sources anticipated in and around the mine are given in Chapter-2

(Sources of Pollution), and the proposed environmental control measures are

suggested in this chapter for effective environment management at the proposed

mine site.




5.2 Air Pollution Management

The potential sources of air pollution arising from the proposed mining operations

are drilling, blasting, top soil, haul roads, exhaust fumes of internal combustion

machines, combusting of domestic fuel oil and transportation of ore in the

vicinity. Air pollution caused by mining and associated activities can be classified

into the following categories:

∗ Gaseous pollutants (nitrogen oxides and carbon monoxide) due to vehicle

movement; and

∗ Particulate matter.

The proposed level of mining is not anticipated to raise the concentration of the

pollutants beyond the prescribed limits of CPCB. However, the following control

measures are suggested to control the PM levels in ambient air.

5.2.1 Air Pollution Control Measures

The main sources of dust in the mining operations are:

1. Drilling operation; 2. Blasting; 3. Excavation and preparatory work in ore & waste; 4. Transportation of ore; and 5. Screening and loading operation.

• Drilling Operations

When blast holes are drilled the cuttings from the holes are flushed out of the

holes by passing the compressed air through drill rods and these cuttings are

allowed to fall outside the collar of the blast hole by means of blowers. The dust

thus generated during drilling is suppressed and allowed to settle in the form of a

cone near the collar of the blast hole itself by use of water during drilling so that

the air is not polluted by the blast hole drilling.

• Blasting

The air pollution during blasting is in the form of chemical gases produced during

the explosion and dust generated during the blast. Burden and spacing are

proposed to be kept at 3 m and 5 m. Milli second delay detonators are proposed

to be used to divide the resultant vibration package into a number of small

vibration level. Blast holes will be normally drilled in rows in the selected block. d

drill holes usually in 3 to 5 rows will be blasted using millisecond delay detonators

(one delay for each hole).Multi- delay firing will be adopted to achieve best

fragmentation and optimum results. Since the number of holes blasted during

any blast event do not exceed a maximum of about /40 holes per blast and on an

average about 20 holes per blast, the gases generated during explosion are not

likely to contribute much to air pollution as no such ill effects of the escaped

gases are observed on vegetation nor on the residents of the nearby townships or

residential houses near to the mine.




• Excavation and Preparatory Work in Ore

During run-of-mine or waste excavation and disposal of waste during dry months

some dust is generated. However, since the lime stone and top soil contain some

natural moisture of the order 2.0 to 2.5 % not much dust is generated during

shoveling and dozing operations of blasted ore/waste even during dry season.

• Transportation of Ore

The blasted mass is loaded by two to three hydraulic excavator having 6.5 m3

and 4.3 m3 will be deployed. The transportation from face to the proposed pit

crusher will be by dumper and then transported to the plant by closed belt

conveyor system to cement plant which is located only 4.5 km away from the

mine.

In every shift about 3 to 4 times and depending up on the road condition water

shall be sprinkled by taking utmost care to ensure that less water is consumed for

effective dust suppression keeping in view the water conservation aspects.

• Screening and Loading Operations

During ore processing water sprinklers will be operated at all possible points in

the proposed limestone mine, thereby reducing the dust generation. During

stacking of lump and fines some dust may generate and arrangements shall be

made to ensure effective dust suppression by water spraying.

It is anticipated that the suspended particulate matter settles down within the

mining area itself due to their higher specific gravity. The PM levels and dust fall

rate as measured over residential colonies are within the tolerable limits. The

sparsely populated villages, which are at farther distance from the active mining

area do not encounter problem due to dust arising from the proposed mining

operations.

5.2.1.1 Additional Control Measures at Mining Area

Apart from the above, following additional control measures to be adopted for

controlling air pollution and dust emissions from the proposed mining activity are

summarized below:

• Proper maintenance of the heavy earth moving machinery and vehicles;

• Regular water sprinkling shall be carried out to suppress the dust on haul

roads, service roads and mining face by dumpers converted into water

sprinklers;

• The haul roads and service roads shall be graded to remove the accumulated

loose material;

• Mostly wet drilling shall be practiced. The dry drilling equipment should have

dust collection system;

• Drilling machines shall have sharp drill bits for drilling holes;

• Blasting should be carried out with optimum charge;

• Blasting operations will be carried out as per Circular-no-8 of DGMS rules;




• Blasting should be avoided during high winds, night time and temperature

inversion periods;

• The top soil shall be given proper slopes;

• During high winds, excavation operations should be suspended;

• The dumpers should not be overloaded so as to prevent spillage of the ore on

the roads during transportation;

• Good housekeeping shall be practiced at all the development and production

benches and at utility service places; and

• Good canopy greenbelt shall be developed around the mining area, which acts

as barrier between mining operation and outside mining area.

5.2.1.2 Control Measures at Mineral Processing Plants

• Water shall be sprinkled on the lime stone during operations. The atomized

water sprinkler aided with compressed air at the point of lime stone dumping

platform should be installed;

• Greenbelt should be developed near loading units;

• The vehicles should be maintained properly and exhaust emission are to be

checked regularly; and

• Speed restrictions should be imposed on the vehicles to minimize the dust

generation.

Employees working at crushing plant, screening plant should be provided with the

respirators regularly.

5.3 Water Pollution

The action program to prevent surface water pollution focuses on prevention of

wash off and mine water directly flowing into nearby natural drainage channels.

Mining operations do not include washing/zigging and hence, there is no water

pollution envisaged. Further, adequate control measures have been adopted to

check not only the run-off water but also uncontrolled run-off water during

monsoon season.

5.3.1 Control Measures at Mines

The control measures to be adopted for controlling water pollution are as follows

• Proper drainage arrangements at mine should be maintained;

• Check dams should be constructed where ever required;

• De-silting of following check dams should be done on regular basis;

• Degraded land should be stabilized by afforestation to prevent soil erosion;

The check dam should have the concrete lining with boulders wrapped in chain

link mesh. However the feasibility of constructing new check dams should be

studied further for the effective surface water pollution control.




5.3.2 Water Pollution Sources

The main sources of water pollution due to mining operations are:

• Turbid flows of the streams flowing from the active mine areas, stock pile and

loading plant areas;

• Domestic sewage; and

• Discharge from service center and auto shops.

• Wastewater Generation, Treatment and Disposal

The total water requirement for the proposed mine is about 125 m3/day. No

wastewater generation is envisaged due to mining activities.

In order to dewater the mine during the rainy season, pumps will be provided.

Thus, it is possible to work this mine even during the monsoon period also. The

mine working is proposed upto 390 m RL and the ground water level is below 350

m RL. Hence, the mine workings will not touch the ground water even at the end

of conceptual period.

Therefore the water collected inside the pit is only the rain water. The area

experiences moderate rainfall from August onwards and the annual average

rainfall is around 735 mm. The pit is provided with proper storage facility for this

by creating a sump at lowest level and this water as per requirement shall be

pumped out.

The surface run-offs due to rain are drained by natural courses like seasonal

nallas, while the rainfall within the pit area will be accumulated in the mine sump.

No adverse impact is fore seen on the existing water regime.

5.3.3 Wastewater Treatment

A small workshop will be provided at mine site without washing facility. Washing

of equipments will be done at central workshop located at plant site. The

workshop wastewater will be treated for removal of oil & grease and suspended

solids. The treated water will also be used for green belt/dust suppression.

Sanitary wastewater which will be generated from toilets will be of negligible

quantity and a soak pit will be provided. No wastewater treatment facility has

been proposed here.

5.3.4 Ground Water Pollution Control Measures

The ground water table in the mine area is not likely to be affected, as no toxic

chemicals are present. The mine working is proposed upto 390 m RL and from

the ground water level is below 350 m RL. Mine working will not intersect ground

water table during the mine life. However, regular monitoring of water levels and

quality in the existing bore wells in the vicinity will be carried out both with

reference to areas spread and time intervals so as to study the hydrodynamics of

the strata.

The measures to be taken for water quality management are given below:




• Working benches will be kept free from loose overburden/waste material;

• Garland drains around the mine will be constructed to arrest silt from the

water flowing out of mining area;

• Periodical clearing of silt accumulation in drains;

• Monitoring of water of garland drains;

• Direct precipitation of rain water in the mine in rainy season will be

channelised to garland drains via settling tanks. The same will be used for

horticulture after desilting; and

• Check dams will be constructed to prevent washing off loose sediments.

The details of check dam, garland drain and settling tank for the arrest of wash

offs during first five years are proposed. Settling tanks will be constructed around

quarry and crude ore stack to settle loose sediments.

5.4 Noise and Vibration

5.4.1 Noise Abatement Measures

The following control measures shall be adopted to keep the ambient noise levels

well below the limits:

• Blast hole drilling shall be restricted to day time hours only;

• Proper and timely maintenance of mining machinery;

• Noise levels shall be controlled by using optimum explosive charge per delay

detonators and proper stemming to prevent blow out of holes;

• Speed of moving dumpers running in the mine shall be limited to moderate

speed to prevent undue noise as per DGMS circulars enforcing safety

standards.

• Provision of user friendly, soft type ear muffs/ear plugs to workers in noise

prone zones in the mine.

• The operator’s chamber shall be safely guarded from the noise pollution by

preventing it from the noise arising because of the machinery;

• The noise level generated by blasting is only momentary and is about 100-

120 dB (A).

• Developing greenbelt on the sides of loading plant.

Apart from above, the following measures shall be taken to protect the workers

from exposure to higher noise levels:

• Provision of protective devices like ear muffs/ear plugs;

• Provision of sound insulated chambers for the workers deployed on machines

producing higher levels of noise like bulldozers, drills and dumpers etc.; and

• Reducing the exposure time of workers to the higher noise levels.

5.4.2 Ground Vibration Control Measures

The following measures shall be adopted to contain the Peak Particle Velocity

(PPV) due to blasting within the permissible limits.

• Proper blast design;

• Avoiding excess confinement of charges;




• Number of blast holes per delay shall be kept one;

• Proper stemming of holes shall always be carried out;

• Blasting shall be avoided during foggy whether and when wind velocity is

more than 25 km/hour;

• The burden distance should not exceeded 50% of bench height i.e., 5m;

• The spacing to burden distance of 1:5 shall be used owing to the fractured

geological formation;

• Staggered pattern of blasting shall be adopted;

• Shorter stemming lengths of less than 2/3rd of burden distance shall be

avoided to reduce overloading of holes and also to control fly rock;

• Maximum number of rows shall be restricted to two since increase in number

of rows results in more confinement of charges in the last rows;

• Number of delays used per blast shall be more so as to reduce charge weight

per delay and creation of shock waves. In addition to this, wherever

confinement is more, like the corners of the block being blasted, belly holes,

etc. extra delay shall be provided. Each line of blast holes shall also being

divided to blast at two or more different timings by using delays;

• A delay of 8-10 milliseconds shall be adopted, as the strata are medium hard

with high frequency of jointing/fracturing;

• Blasting operations shall be carried out only during day time as per mine

safety guidelines;

• A safe distance of about 500 m from center of blasting should be maintained;

and

• During blasting, other activities in the immediate vicinity shall be temporarily

stopped.

Further, the proposed afforestation also helps in reducing the noise and vibration

level to some extent.

5.4.3 Mitigation Measures for Noise Control

Controlling noise and ground vibration level due to blasting is important aspect in

the opencast mining considering the effect on the surrounding environment. The

noise level monitoring carried out in the residential areas has indicated that the

present daytime noise levels are below 55 dB(A). The noise will be generated by

drilling, blasting, movement of heavy machinery, crushing and air blast in the

active mining area. Air blast is caused due to unconfined or partially confined

explosion and detonating cords exposed in atmosphere. In addition, green belts

around the infrastructure will be established so as to contain the work zone noise

levels.

5.4.4 Vibration Abatement

The vibrations by the mechanical effects act on existing rocks and subject them

to tensile, compressive and shearing stresses, which spoil their mechanical

characteristics with an immediate consequence. The low intensity vibrations are

also caused due to the permanent installation like compressors and traffic.

Among all these, blasting is the major source of vibration.

Ground vibrations measured as peak particle velocity, depends mainly on

maximum charge/delay, distance of nearest structure and characteristic of




intervening strata. Out of the above three main factors, one can control only

maximum charge per delay to minimize ground vibrations.

The ground vibrations can cause:

∗ Land instability: Distorts working faces of benches and downfalls of the waste

rock dump;

∗ Cracks in buildings which are present in the mine premises, mine townships

and in the nearby villages; and

∗ Psychological discomfort to human beings as well as to nearby fauna.

The blasting operations in the proposed mine will be carried out by deep hole

drilling and blasting using delay detonators, which are bound to reduce the

ground vibrations. Further, the ground vibrations will be controlled by using

modern shock tubes with delay non-electric detonators.

The measures adopted to contain the Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) due to blasting

should be within the permissible limits. Further, the ongoing afforestation

programme will reduce the noise and vibration level to some extent.

5.5 Reclamation and Rehabilitation

The area will be progressively reclaimed and rehabilitated as and when areas are

devoid of lime stone come into being. After the exhaustion of limestone within the

area during life of mine. The reclamation of mined out area will be undertaken by

means of water reservoir and greenbelt development on backfilled area.

5.5.1 Reclamation measures of mined out area during planned period of 5 years

There is no vegetation in the applied mining lease area. Therefore, it is not likely

that there will be a loss of vegetation due to mining operation. The excavation

made in the mineral zone cause voids during operation of the mine. Out of the

50m depth of Limestone, it is proposed to excavate in part of the area upto 30 m

depth during the Plan period. Hence, it will not be possible to go for reclamation

concurrent to mining operations. However from next 5 year block period onwards

backfilling will be carried-out on worked-out benches with generated top soil and

at the cessation of mining operation, water reservoir shall be created, after taking

precautions to fence-off the worked-out area. Lease is yet to be granted, hence,

question of abandoned quarries/ pits will not arise.

5.5.2 Reclamation of Waste Dumps

No surface dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste

generation. As per the conceptual plan prepared upto lease period, the post

mining land use details are given below in Table-5.1.




TABLE-5.1

POST MINING LAND USE DETAILS

Sr.No Particulars Area (ha) Means of Rehabilitation

1 Area of mining 593.311 Backfilling and plantation – 85 ha Rain water harvesting pits – 508.311 ha

2 Area of mineral storage 7.000 Plantation

3 Statutory buildings 10.000 Will be kept for watch and wards

4 Area for roads 2.500 Plantation

5 7.5 m safety zone 15.000 Bunds with plantation

6 10 m safety zone for village roads

3.500 Plantation /greenbelt

Total 631.311 Source: Mine Plan

5.6 Waste Dump Management

There is no waste generation during the plan period. Hence, no surface dumping

is proposed, except top soil generation. A part of the generated top soil will be

utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety zone covering an area of 5.00 ha

and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the lease

covering an area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height. Subsequently, the

preserved top soil shall be utilized for backfilling on worked out benches as per

requirement.

• Quantity of Overburden Generated

The black cotton soil overlying the limestone bed forms the overburden which

shall be used in afforestation work. There is no waste handling during the plan

period expect top soil. The top soil will be stored separately and used on the top

of matured dump yard for onward plantation activity.

• Manner of Disposal

The limestone in the area is either outcropping or concealed beneath the soil

cover varying from 1 to 4 m with average thickness of 2.35 m. The quantity of

1.128 million cum of soil has been estimated to handle. A part of the generated

top soil will be utilized for formation of bund on 7.5 m safety covering an area of

5.0 ha and remaining quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of the

lease covering and area of 8.50 ha in single terrace of 10 m height.

Subsequently, the preserved top soil will be utilized for backfilling on worked out

benches as per requirement.

• Stacking of Sub Grade Ore

� Mineral Reject

Limestone of grade varying from 39.97% to 49.97% CaO. is available in the area,

which will be suitably blended as per the cement plant requirement. Hence, there

is no mineral rejects generation from this applied area during the plan period.




� Sub-grade

There is no sub grade mineral generation from this mine during the plan period.

As per the present guide lines there is no sub grade. Only mineral rejects, which

is below the cutoff grade and above the threshold limit.

5.7 Soil Conservation

The black cotton soil overlying the limestone bed forms the overburden. Topsoil

will be reused over the fully reclaimed benches for biological growth in plantation

schemes and filling the sapling pits.

5.7.1 Soil Erosion Control Measures

During rain, there is possibility of washing off of loose materials along the plateau

slopes. Therefore, following precautionary measures will be undertaken for

controlling the wash off.

• Around the terraces are proposed.

• Check dams are proposed along the lower contours which will be constructed

by boulders. During rain, water passes through the dams and wash-

off/sediments are arrested. Settled sediments, in between the dump and

check dam will be cleared up by the help of dozer or back-hoe.

• Shrubs are proposed to be planted along the terraces to prevent erosion.

Top of the temporary low grade limestone dump will be properly leveled and

compacted to prevent seepage of direct precipitated water. The reclamation plan

is shown in Figure-5.1.

5.8 Green Belt Development

5.8.1 Introduction

With rapid industrialization and consequent deleterious impact of pollutants on

environment, values of environmental protection offered by trees are becoming

clear. Trees are very suitable for detecting, recognizing and monitoring air

pollution effects. Monitoring of biological effects of air pollutant by the use of

plants as indicators has been applied on local, regional and national scale. Trees

function as sinks of air pollutants, besides their bio-esthetical values, owing to its

large surface area. Annual need of oxygen for one person is met by 150 m2 of

leaf surface i.e. 30-40 m2 of greenery. So it is necessary to develop green belt in

and around the polluted site with suitable species to combat the air pollution

effectively.




FIGURE-5.1

RECLAMATION PLAN




The plantation development not only functions as foreground and background

landscape features resulting in harmonizing and amalgamating the physical

structures of the mine with surrounding environment, but also acts as pollution

sink as indicated above. Thus, implementation of afforestation program is of

paramount importance. In addition to augmenting present vegetation, it will also

check soil erosion, make the ecosystem more complex and functionally, stable and

make the climate more conducive.

5.8.2 Plantation Programme

The main aim of plantation in and around the mine areas is to stabilize the land

to protect it from rain and wind erosion. As the leftover working area shall

contain broken material and fine particles, stabilization against wind erosion is

also a must. The plantation scheme broadly covers the following areas:

∗ Plantation around peripheral portions of mine and other built up structures;

∗ Afforestation of barren areas in the lease hold;

∗ Gardens, parks and haul road plantation;

∗ Plantation by way of reclamation /rehabilitation of mined out blocks; and

∗ Improving the conditions of catchment areas and to prevent erosion.

The calculated life of the mine based on available reserves and the proposed

production plan is more than 50 years. The reclamation and rehabilitation in

phased manner along with details of afforestation are given in Table-5.2.

TABLE-5.2

PLANTATION SCHEDULE

Period (Year)

Bund Formation on

Safety Zone (m)

Proposed plantation Year

Location Name of Species

Area (ha) No of Plants

1 1500 1.00 1000 Bund on safety zone

Neem, Jamun, Tamarind, Jali, Subabu and

other species

2 5170 1.00 1000

3 - 1.00 1000

4 - 1.00 1000

5 - 1.00 1000

Total 6670 5.00 5000

Source: Mine Plan

All protection measures like provision of garland drain, afforestation and

stabilization will be taken care on year to year basis as per the requirement. A

final mine closure plan incorporating time schedule for abandonment shall be

submitted before one year of its closure as per rule.

The following steps will be taken for post plantation care:

•••• Activation of feeding roots by loosening the soil regularly;

•••• Incorporation of litter in the soil as manure for healthy growth of the plant;

•••• Improving aeration & water infiltration;

•••• Clearing of weeds;

•••• Supporting of saplings;




•••• Formation of soil mulch;

•••• Protection from browsing animals & trespassers by providing fencing;

•••• Fertilizer application, if necessary; and

•••• Regular watering.

5.8.2.1 Plantation Species

The plantation species have been suggested based on the following:

� Adaptable to the geo-climatic conditions of the area;

� Mix of round, spreading, oblong and conical canopies;

� Different heights ranging from 4 m to 20 m; and

� Preferably evergreen trees.

Plantation in areas with good soil cover especially for plantation around the mine,

initially should be started by direct seeding synchronous with the onset of rains.

This involves preparation of local site with regard to water harvesting, soil and

water conservation measures, strip cultivation and weeding. It also gives the

initial advantage of time saving by eliminating nursery, transport and planting. It

also has the advantage of improving the form of the tree and its rooting pattern.

Green belt is proposed surrounding the ML area and along the permanent

approach road to the mine from the plant. The main purpose of green belt

development is to contribute to the following factors:

• Improve the aesthetics of the area;

• Trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions;

• Attenuate noise levels generated from the mine;

• Prevent soil ecological homeostasis;

• Prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation; and

• Utilize the runoff water.

The implementation of the development of green belt around the ML area will be

of paramount importance as it will not only add up as an aesthetic feature, but

also acts as a pollution sink.

To protect as a dust filter as well as a sound barrier, within the green barrier, it is

necessary to have the proper selection of species for plantation. They should be

of fast growing to have optimum penetrability. They should be deep rooted to be

firm against the wind blow. They should have dense canopy, because the gaps in

the canopy will act as wind tunnels. They should also form abundant litter on the

floor to improve the soil quality. One hectare of land with broad-leaved species

would arrest 30 to 50 tonnes of dust generated. 5.0 ha of area has been

proposed to be developed as green belt. Expert’s advice will be taken on selection

of species for this purpose. In this green barrier, rows of saplings/seedlings at 2.5

m centre to centre are to be planted. While planting, the pits that are dug out

will be filled with a mixture of manure and soil. Selection of typical species for

plantation is furnished below. However, the advice of experts shall be taken

before finalizing them.




Plant Species for Greenbelt

The different species that have history of good survival and growth similar site

conditions shall be planted. The suggested species for plantation are given in the

Table-5.3.

TABLE-5.3

SPECIES FOR PLANTATION

Sr.No Tree Species Common Name Family

1 Acacia nilotica Babul Mimosaceae

2 Annona squamosa Custard Apple, Sitaphal Annonaceae

3 Bauhinia variegata Kanchnar Caesalpinaceae

4 Cassia fistula Amaltas, Indian Laburnum Caesalpinaceae

5 Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo Fabaceae

6 Erythrina indica Pangri, Dadak Fabaceae

7 Ficus benghalensis Bar, Bargad Moraceae

8 Ficus religiosa Sacred Fig Moraceae

9 Grewia tiliaefolia Dhaman Malvaceae

10 Morus alba/Morus indica Mulberry Moraceae

11 Syzgium cumnii Jamun Myrtaceae

12 Tamarindus indica Imli Caesalpinaceae

13 Alstonia scholaris Chattin, Devils tree Apocynaceae

14 Terminalia arjuna Arjuna Combretaceae

Plantation for Arresting Dust

Tree, particularly having compact branching, closely arranged leaves, broad

leaves of simple elliptical and hairy structure, shiny or waxy leaves and hairy

twigs are efficient filters for dust. The leaf surface is 10-20 times greater than the

earth surface occupied by the plants. It is known that particles up to 80 –milli

micron may stick to vertical surfaces. It is found that 8-m wide greenbelt can

reduce the dust fall by 2-3 times. The following species are suggested to arrest

the dust pollution.

Scientific Name Common Name

1. Alstonia scholaris Devils tree/ Saptaparni

2. Cassia fistula Amaltas

3. Bauhinia purpurea Purple Orchid Tree

4. Cassia siamea Yellow Cassia

5. Peltophorum ferrugineum Copper pod

6. Ficus religiosa Peepal

7. Tamarindus indica Imli/ Tamarind

8. Melia azadirach Persian Lilac

9. Azadirachta indica Neem

10. Terminalia arjuna Arjuna




Plantation to absorb Sulphur Dioxide (S02) Emissions

It is found that 500 m2 greenery detoxifies the 70% of the SO2 from the

atmosphere, which acts as pollutant. The following plants are suggested for

planation to absorb SO2 in the air:



2. Lagerstoemia flos-reginae Pride of India

3. Mimusops elengi Bakul

4. Albizia lebbeck Indian Siris, East Indian Walnut

5. Ficus religiosa Peepal

6. Butea monosperma Palash/ Flame of the forest




10. Pterocarpus marsupium Bijasal

Plantation to Reduce Noise Pollution

Trees having thick and fleshy leaves with petioles flexible and capacity to

withstand vibration are suitable. Heavier branches and trunk of the trees also

deflect or refract the sound waves. The density, height and width are critical

factors in designing an adequate noise screen plantation. Combination of trees and

shrubs together with suitable landforms and design appears to be the best system

for combating noise pollution. In general, more than 65 % noise is produced from

factory, which is unhealthy to living world. The following species are suggested to

reduce noise pollution.





4. Grevillea robusta Silver Oak

5. Tamarindus indica Tamarind


7. Terminalia chebula Haritaki

8. Szygium cumunii Jamun

9. Psidium guava Guava/ Amrud

10. Ficus hispida Hairy Fig/ Cluster fig

Post Plantation Care

Immediately after planting the saplings, watering shall be done. Further watering

will depend on the rainfall. In the dry seasons watering will be regularly done

especially during April to June. Watering frequency of the young plants will be

more frequent, manuring will be done using organic manure (farm yard manure

etc.) Younger saplings will be surrounded with tree guards. Diseased and dead

plants will be uprooted and destroyed and replaced by fresh saplings. Growth /




health and survival rate of saplings will be regularly monitoring and remedial

action.

5.9 Measures to Improve Socio-Economic Conditions of Local Population

Within the core zone, there are no settlements and dwellings. The mining staff

and workers come for work from surrounding villages. JCCL shall extend

community development programmes and social benefits like drinking water,

health care and other site services, measures not only to the persons employed

in the mines, but also to the local villagers.

The State and Central Governments will also get benefited in the form of

revenues/ royalties, excise, taxes and cess etc. Ultimately the mining forms the

basic activity, which will benefit many people who are depending upon it for their

livelihood for a number of years.

5.9.1 Employment to Local People

The mining and associated activities offer opportunities of employment to the

eligible people from the ethnic population. People also get employment in the

other developmental activities and also the mineral based activities in and around

the complexes, especially in transport of limestone and cement which shall be

given to the contract labour. The mining project envisages employment

opportunities for about 143 persons both as direct employees under skilled, semi-

skilled and unskilled categories and as indirect employees in contractual works.

5.10 Environment Management System

5.10.1 Introduction

The earlier sections identified measures for environmental protection especially

for providing the necessary pollution control to comply with the standards

stipulating the limits for emitting pollutants in air, water or on land so that the

assimilative capacity is not exceeded.

Environmental policy at mines level is yet to be defined formally. Standards are

stipulated by various regulatory agencies to limit the emission of pollutants in air

and water. Similarly, a mandatory practice is recommended for preparing an

Environment Statement each year in order to encourage the mines to allow

efficient use of resources in their production processes and reduce the quantities

of waste per unit of product. This in itself is not sufficient since this does not

provide an assurance that its environmental performance not only meets, will

continue to meet, legislative and policy requirements.

5.10.2 Formation of an Environmental Management System

The environmental management system to be formed by mine will enable it to

maximize its beneficial effects and minimize its adverse effects with emphasis on

prevention. It should:




• Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from the activities,

products and services to determine those of significance;

• Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from incidents,

accidents and potential emergency situations:

• Identify the relevant legislative and regulatory requirements:

• Enable priorities to be identified and pertinent environmental objectives and

targets to be set:

• Facilitate planning, control, monitoring, auditing and review activities to

ensure that the policy is complied with; and

• Allow periodic evaluation to suit changing circumstances so that it remains

relevant.

5.10.3 Implementation of an Environmental Management System

• Commitment

It is essential that the top management of the mine is committed to development

of its activities in an environmentally sound manner and supports all efforts in

achieving this objective.

Experience has shown that all attempts to change the processes and production

methods which reduce/ prevent wastes and inefficient use of resources ultimately

result not only in environmentally sound practices but also better business

returns.

• Preparatory Environmental Review

A mining industry with no formal environmental management system first

establish its current position with regard to environment through a preparatory

environmental review. This should cover four areas:

∗ Legislative and regulatory requirements;

∗ Evaluation and registration of significant parameters and their environmental

impacts;

∗ Review of existing environmental management practices and procedures; and

∗ Assessment of feedback from investigation of previous environmental

incidents and non-compliance with legislation, regulations or existing policies

and procedures.

The resulting report should address:

∗ The nature and extent of problems and deficiencies;

∗ The priorities to be accorded to rectify them, and

∗ An improvement program designed to ensure that the personnel and material

resources required are identified and made available.

• Environmental Policy

The mine management should actively initiate, develop and support the

environmental policy, which is relevant to its activities, products and services and

their environmental effects. Broadly this should:




∗ Be consistent with the occupational health and safety policy and other policies

(such as quality policy);

∗ Indicate which of the industrial activities are covered by the environmental

management system;

∗ Be communicated and implemented at all levels of the project; and

∗ Be available publicly.

• Organization and Personnel

To facilitate the implementation of the EMS, one of the most important aspects

relate to the organization and personnel. The related issues are:

∗ Define and document the responsibility, authority and interrelations of key

personnel involved in the implementation of the environmental policy,

objectives and environmental management system;

∗ Identify the in-house verification requirements and procedures including

resources and personnel;

∗ Appoint a Management Representative (MR);

∗ Communicate to employees at all levels the importance of compliance with

the environmental policy, their role and responsibilities in achieving

compliance, the potential consequences of departures from the specified

procedures, and identify and provide appropriate training; and

∗ Establish and maintain procedures to ensure that contractors are made aware

of the environmental management system requirements and provisions.

• Environmental Effects

The mine management should establish and maintain procedures for:

∗ Receiving, documenting and responding to internal as well as external

communications concerning environmental aspects and management;

∗ Identifying, examining and evaluating the environmental effects of its

activities under normal and abnormal/emergency situations (including risk

assessment) and compiling significant effects in a register; and

∗ Recording all legislative, regulatory and other policy requirements and codes

in a register.

• Environmental Objectives and Targets

The objectives should be set with a view to realizing gradual and steady

improvements in environmental performance through application of best available

and economically viable technology.

The areas targeted for improvement should be those where improvements are

most necessary to reduce risks (to environmental and industry) and liabilities.

These should be identified through cost-benefit analysis wherever practicable and

should be quantitative and achievable.




• Environmental Management Program

The establishment of an environmental management program is the key to

compliance with the industry’s environmental policy and achievement of the

environmental objectives and targets.

It should designate the responsibility for achieving the targets at each level and

the means thereof. It should deal with the actions required for the consequences

of the mine’s past activities as well as address the life cycle new mine

developments so as to effectively control adverse impacts.

• Environmental Management Manual and Documentation

The documentation is intended to provide an adequate description of the

environmental management system. The manual is expected to provide a

reference to the implementation and maintenance of the system.

• Operational Control

The management responsibilities should be defined to ensure that the control,

verification, measurement and testing of environment parameters within the

project are adequately coordinated and effectively performed.

The control, verification, measurement and testing should be made through

documented procedures and work instructions defining the manner of conducting

activities, the absence of which can lead to violation of the environment policy.

In the event of non-compliance, procedures for investigation of the causative

mechanism should be established and the factors reported for corrective actions.

• Environment Management Records

The project should establish and maintain a system of records to demonstrate

compliance with the environmental management systems and the extent of

achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition the other

records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records should

address the following:

∗ Details of failure in compliance and corrective action;

∗ Details of indigents and corrective action;

∗ Details of complaints and follow-up action;

∗ Appropriate contractor and supplier information;

∗ Inspection and maintenance reports;

∗ Product identification and composition data;

∗ Monitoring data; and

∗ Environmental training records.

• Environmental Management Audit

The management audits are to determine whether the activities are conforming

to the environmental management systems and effective in implementing the




environmental policy. They may be internal or external, but carried out

impartially and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of

the environmental process and expertise in relevant discipline is also required.

Appropriate audit program and protocols should be established.

• Environmental Statement

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as

amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and

Forests in April 1993, an Environmental Statement should be prepared annually.

This should include the consumption of total resources (raw material and water

per tonne of product), quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water

discharged, quantity of hazardous and solid waste generation, pollution

abatement measures, conservation of natural resources and cost of production

vis-a vis the investment on pollution abatement. This may be an internal or

external audits, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person properly

trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in

relevant disciplines is also required.

The intention of this statement is:

∗ To identify the process /production areas where resources can be used more

efficiently through a comparison with the figures of a similar industry (thereby

reducing the consumption per unit of product);

∗ To determine the areas where waste generation can be minimized at source

and through end of pipe treatment (thereby reducing the wastes generated

and discharged per unit of product); and

∗ Initiate a self-correcting /improvement system through an internal analysis to

achieve cost reduction through choice of superior technology and more

efficient practices.

• Environmental Management Reviews

The senior management should periodically review the Environmental

Management System (EMS) to ensure its suitability and effectiveness. The need

for possible changes in the environmental policy and objectives for continuous

improvement should be ascertained and revisions made accordingly.

EMS based on the above objectives should be formulated and implemented at the

mine site.

5.11 Occupational Safety and Health

Occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity and good

employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health in

limestone mine are fugitive dust and noise. Safety of employee during blasting

operation and maintenance of mining equipment and handling of explosive

materials are taken care of as per Mine Regulations 1961. To avoid any adverse

affects on the health of workers due to dust, heat, noise and vibration sufficient

measures have been provided in the mining project. These include:




* Provision of wet drilling and drilling with built dust catcher;

* Provision of rest shelters for mine workers with amenities like drinking water,

fans, toilets etc.;

* Provision of personal protection devices to the workers;

* Rotation of workers exposed to noise premises;

* Dust suppression of haul road; and

* First-aid facilities in the mining area.

Mines management should open a separate occupational health services cell. The

occupational health sevices should be fully functional. It should be managed by a

well qualified doctor and trained doctor of Dy.CMO cadre and assisted by trained

nurses. The health cell should consist of:

� A computer with printer;

� Titamus 2a vision tester for vision examination;

� LYNK- Respirable dust kit;

� Elekon micro controlled diagnostic Audiometer;

� Precision Impulses Integrating Sound Level Meter; and

� Area heat stress monitoring Modern.

5.12 Training and Human Resources Development

Though emphasis shall be on appointing qualified and experienced personnel in

various disciplines, it is also ensured that they are adequately trained for the jobs

expected of them. For this basic training is given to raw and new appointees,

whereas refresher training is given to others keeping in view provisions of Mines

Vocational Training Rules 1966.

Personnel who have to operate and/or maintain heavy earth moving equipment

shall be trained under the guidance of the manufacturers either at the site or in

the works of the manufacturers.

The training of mine personnel shall be conducted regularly at the operating

mines with respect to environmental protection.

Training and human resource development is not a single time function but a

continuous requirement to up-date and improve the skills of employees. Hence,

in addition to whatever statutory training is required, the company looks forward

to continue the process by way of participative training of the personnel in

various courses, workshops, seminars training courses organized by

manufacturers/ professional agencies.


Chapter-6 Environmental Monitoring Programme


6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

6.1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested in Chapter-4 shall be implemented so as to

reduce the impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed project.

In order to facilitate easy implementation of mitigation measures, these are

phased as per the priority implementation as given in Table-6.1.

TABLE-6.1

RECOMMENDED IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Sr. No. Recommendations Time Requirement Schedule

1 Air pollution control

measures

Before commissioning of

respective units

Immediate

2 Water pollution control

measures

Before commissioning of the

mine

Immediate

3 Noise control measures Along with the commissioning of

the mine

Immediate

4

Ecological preservation and

upgradation

Stage wise implementation Immediate

&

Progressive

6.2 Environmental Monitoring

The environmental monitoring for the proposed mining operations shall be

conducted as follows:

•••• Air quality;

•••• Water and wastewater quality;

•••• Noise levels;

•••• Soil quality; and

•••• Greenbelt development.

A centralized environmental monitoring cell will be established in mining project.

Monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters are of immense

importance to assess the status of environment during operation phase of lime

stone mine. With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring program

can serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environmental conditions due to

mining operations and suitable mitigatory steps could be taken in time to

safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as important as that of control of

pollution since the efficiency of control measures can only be determined by

monitoring. The monitoring program for implementation is given below.

• Air Pollution and Meteorological Aspects

Both ambient air quality and meteorology will be monitored. The ambient air will

be monitored twice in a week in line with the guidelines of Central Pollution

Control Board and SPCB. Meteorological parameters like wind speed, wind

direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall will be recorded continuously

at mine lease area.




• Water and Wastewater Quality

The storm water will be analyzed in the rainy season. The ground and surface

water quality will be monitored in every season at selected locations. The water

depths will be monitored in the wells of surrounding villages in every season.

• Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment will be monitored regularly. The

ground vibration will be recorded at the time of blasting. The frequency of noise

monitoring will be once in a month in the work zone. The ambient noise levels in

the surrounding villages will be monitored once in six months.

• Soil Sampling

Soil samples will be tested before plantation/vegetation of the area. The

environmental monitoring cell will co-ordinate all monitoring programs at site and

data thus generated will be regularly furnished to the state regulatory agencies.

The environmental monitoring program to be implemented is given in Table-6.2.

TABLE-6.2

MONITORING SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

Sr.

No.

Particulars Monitoring

Frequency

Duration of

Sampling

Important Monitoring

Parameters

1 Air Pollution and Meteorology

Air Quality

A Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Selected 4 locations in and around ml area specified by KSPCB

Twice in a week

24 hr continuously

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and CO

B Fugitive dust sampling

at work zone as per CPCB or SPCB and IBM guidelines

Once in three

months

24 hr

continuously

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx

Meteorology

a Meteorological data to be monitored at mine lease area

Daily Continuous Monitoring

Wind speed, direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall.

2 Water and Wastewater Quality

A Industrial/Domestic

1 Sewage treatment plant from colony

Once in a month

24 hr composite

As per EPA rules, 1989.

B Water quality in the study area

1 Ground Water quality

Once in a

month

Grab

As per the parameters specified

under IS:10500

2

Surface Water Once in a month

Grab

3 Water flows in major streams near to Mine leases or as per CPCB or SPCB guidelines

Once in a season

Once time As per IS specifications

4 Water level studies in

well or bore wells or

Once in a

season

One time Water levels and chemistry of

water




Sr.

No.

Particulars Monitoring

Frequency

Duration of

Sampling

Important Monitoring

Parameters

piezometers in Mine leases and surrounding areas

3 Industrial Noise Levels

1 Major noise generating sources

Every fortnight

24 hr continuous with 1 hr

interval

Noise level in dB(A)

2 Near the blasting /drilling site

Fortnight 24 hr continuous with 1 hr

interval


3 Along the haul road

for transportation noise

Fortnight 24 hr

continuous with 1 hr interval


Ambient Noise Levels

10 Locations around mine lease areas

Seasonal 24 hr continuous

with one hr interval

Noise levels in dB(A)

4. Soil Characteristics

1

Selected 4 locations in core and buffer zone in nearby villages

Pre-Monsoon season

One Grab sample

Colour, textural class, grain size, distribution, pH, Electrical Conductivity, Bulk Density, Porosity, Infiltration rate,

Moisture retention capacity, Wilting Co-efficient, Organic matter Na, N, K, PO4, SO4, SAR,

Base Exchange Capacity, Pb, Cu, Zn, Cd, Fe.

6.3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis

All environmental monitoring and relevant operational data will be stored in a

relational database. Regular data extracts and interpretive reports will be sent to

the regulator.

6.3.1 Air Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

The concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace / work zone

environment will be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than

threshold limit values are observed, the source of fugitive emissions will be

identified and necessary measures taken. If the levels are high suitable measures

as detailed in EMP shall be initiated.

The ground level concentrations of PM, SO2, NOX and CO in the ambient air will be

monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise will be investigated to identify

the causes, and appropriate action will be initiated. Greenbelt will be developed

for minimising dust propagation. The ambient air quality data should be

transferred and processed in a centralised computer facility equipped with

required software. Trend and statistical analysis should be done.




6.3.2 Water and Wastewater Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

Methods prescribed in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and

Wastewater" prepared and published jointly by American Public Health

Association (APHA), American Water Works Association (AWWA) and Water

Pollution Control Federation (WPCF); Manual on Water and Wastewater Analysis

published by NEERI, Nagpur are recommended.

6.4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables

A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items will be provided for monitoring

of environmental parameters. Alternatively, monitoring can be outsourced to a

recognized laboratory.

a) Air Quality and Meteorology

Following equipment and consumable items will be made available with the

environmental cell to meet the monitoring frequency and to implement the

monitoring program.

• Respirable dust samplers;

• Personal sampler;

• CO monitor;

• Weather station (automatic recording);

• Spectrophotometer (visible range);

• Single pan balance;

• Relevant chemicals as per IS:5182; and

• Chemical/glass ware.

b) Water and Waste Water Quality

The sampling should be done in jerry cans as per the standard procedures laid

down by IS: 2488. Following equipment are recommended to be available with the

environmental cell:

• BOD incubator;

• Refrigerator;

• Oven;

• Stop watch;

• Thermometer;

• PH meter;

• Distilled water plant;

• Spectrophotometer; and

• Relevant chemicals and glass wares.

c) Noise Levels

The environmental cell shall have sound level meter to record noise levels in

different scales like A, B and C with slow and fast response options and vibration

meter. Further, any recognized agency can also be engaged for carrying out the

above stated monitoring works.




6.5 Occupational Health and Safety

Occupational health and safety is very closely related to productivity and good

employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health in

mining project are fugitive dust and noise. Safety of employee during blasting

operation and maintenance of mining equipment and handling of explosive

materials are taken care of as per Mine Regulations, 1961. To avoid any adverse

effects on the health of workers due to dust, heat, noise and vibration, sufficient

measures have been proposed in the mining project.

These include:

• Effective de-dusting system in the crusher house;

• Provision of wet drilling and dust collectors;

• Provision of rest shelters for mine workers with amenities like drinking water,

fans, toilets etc.;

• Provision of personal protection devices to the workers;

• Rotation of workers exposed to noise premises;

• Closed control room in crusher house with proper ventilation;

• Dust suppression of haul road; and

• First-aid facilities.

Occupational Health Survey of the employees will be carried out at regular

intervals.

6.6 Budgetary Allocation for Environmental Protection

As environmental protection will be monitored and implemented by a centralized environmental management cell, the fiscal estimates have been arrived for the mining activity, which is discussed in the following paragraphs.

JCCL is proposed to spend about Rs 35 lakhs towards environmental protection

measures. The details of investment for procuring the equipments for efficient

control and monitoring of pollution are given in Table-6.3.

TABLE-6.3 BUDGET PROVISION FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

Sr. No

Particulars Expenditure (Rs. Lakhs)

1 Air & water pollution 17

2 Environmental monitoring 10

3 Green belt / afforestation 3

4 Engineering constructions like retention wall, check dam, garland drain, settling tank

5

Sub Total 35


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

This chapter describes the public consultation for the proposed limestone mine for

production capacity 7.0 MTPA, Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan,

occupational health and safety issues.

7.1 Public Consultation

The public hearing for the proposed limestone mine was conducted near

Taranhalli village, Chittapur taluka, Gulbarga of Karnataka State as per new

Environmental impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September 2006 and

subsequent amendment as per TOR conditions issued by MOEF.

The press notification indicating date and venue of the public hearing was issued

by member Secretary, Karnataka State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB) on

09.08.2016 in prominent newspapers Viz. Vijaya Karnataka, Times of India, Praja

Vani and Deccan Herald with project details inviting suggestions views, comments

and objections from the public regarding the above mentioned project. The

details are enclosed as Annexure-XII.

7.2 Occupational Health and Safety

In mining, where multifarious activities are involved during mine development and

operational phase, like drilling, blasting loading and transportation; the men,

materials and machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons, industrialization

generally brings several problems like occupational health and safety.

The mining planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take steps to minimize the

impacts of mining and to ensure appropriate occupational health and safety

including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under mine

development and mine operational phase.

7.2.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during mine development and operational

phase. However, the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the above

phases.

• Construction and Erection

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to

constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to

arrangements to reduce it within TLV's, necessary protective equipments will be

supplied to workers.

• Operation and Maintenance

The problem of occupational health, in the mine development and operational phase

is primarily due to noise which could affect hearing. The necessary personal

protective equipments will be given to all the workers. The working personnel will be

given the following appropriate personnel protective equipments.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


� Industrial safety helmet;

� Crash helmets;

� Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;

� Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;

� Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses;

� Cylindrical type earplug;

� Ear muffs;

� Canister gas mask;

� Self contained breathing apparatus;

� Leather apron;

� Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;

� Boiler suit;

� Safety belt/line man's safety belt;

� Leather hand gloves;

� Asbestos hand gloves;

� Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;

� Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;

� Lead hand glove;

� Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves; and

� Industrial safety shoes with steel toe.

Full-fledged hospital facilities will be provided round the clock for attending

emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel will be medically

examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of employment.

This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.

7.2.2 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during mine development and operational phase

is of concern. Safety plan is prepared and implemented in the mine. The

preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is known as

emergency plan. The disaster in the plant is possible due to collapse of structures

and fire/explosion etc.

Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and

maintenance phases, and the plant formulates safety policy with the following

regulations:

• To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;

• To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in

the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and

equipment;

• To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;

• To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and

clothing and to ensure their proper use;

• To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their

work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;

• To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making

necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and

up to date knowledge;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and

illness at work;

• To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to

employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is

given to these matters;

• To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate

fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this

service;

• To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness

and incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to taking

corrective, remedial and preventive action;

• To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and

safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;

• To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language

of employees;

• To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/processes involved

in a plant; and

• To ensure regular safety inspection by competent persons at suitable intervals of

all buildings, equipments, work places and operations.

7.2.3 Safety Organization

• Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts

of workers and advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training

programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to

occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of

Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer by

industry, every contractor, who employs more than 143 workers, will also employ

one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions

of contract.

• Mine development and Operational phase

When the mine development is completed the posting of safety officers will be in

accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and

responsibilities shall be as defined there of.

7.2.4 Safety Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of

hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles are constituted

in each area of work. The circle consists of 5-6 employees from that area. The circle

normally will meet for about an hour every week.

7.2.5 Safety Training

A full-fledged training center will be provided at the Mine. Safety training will be

provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called from

Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular employees,


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


limited contractor labors will also be provided safety training. To create safety

awareness safety films are being shown to workers and leaflets distributed. Some

precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires are:

• Compartmentalization of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of

cable passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and

identifying the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic

and manual fire fighting operations;

• Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for

cable shafts;

• Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and

interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;

• Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and

regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and

• Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.2.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

The health of all employees is monitored once in a year for early detection of any

ailment due to exposure to dust, heat and noise.

7.3 Risk Assessment

The complete mining operation will be carried out under the management control

and direction of a qualified mine manager holding a First Class Manager’s

Certificate of competency to manage a metalliferous mine granted by the DGMS,

Dhanbad. The DGMS have been regularly issuing standing orders, model standing

orders and circulars to be followed by the mine management in case of disaster, if

any. Moreover, mining staff will be sent to refresher courses from time to time to

keep them alert. However, following natural/industrial hazards may occur during

normal operation.

• Accident due to explosives;

• Accident due to heavy mining equipment; and

• Sabotage in case of magazine.

In order to take care of above hazard/disasters, the following control measures

will be adopted:

• All safety precautions and provisions of Mine Act,1952, Metalliferrous Mines

Regulation, 1961 and Mines Rules,1955 will be strictly followed during all

mining operations;

• Entry of unauthorized persons will be prohibited;

• Fire fighting and first-aid provisions in the mines office complex and mining

area;

• Provisions of all the safety appliances such as safety boot, helmets, goggles

etc. will be made available to the employees and regular check for their use;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Training and refresher courses for all the employees working in hazardous

premises; Under Mines vocational training rules all employees of mines shall

have to undergo the training at a regular interval;

• Working of mine, as per approved plans and regularly updating the mine

plans;

• Cleaning of mine faces will be regularly done;

• Handling of explosives, charging and blasting will be carried out by competent

persons only;

• Provision of magazine at a safe place with fencing and necessary security

arrangement;

• Regular maintenance and testing of all mining equipment as per

manufacturer’s guidelines;

• Suppression of dust on the haulage roads;

• Adequate safety equipment will be provided at explosive magazine; and

• Increasing the awareness of safety and disaster through competitions, posters

and other similar drives.

For any type of above disaster, a rescue team will be formed by training the

mining staff with specialized training.

7.3.1 Possible Hazards in Open Cast Mine

There are various factors, which can cause disaster in the mines. The mining

activity has several disaster prone areas. The identification of various hazards is

shown in Figure-7.1 and the hazards are discussed below:

7.3.1.1 Blasting

Most of the accidents from blasting occur due to the projectiles, as they may

some times go even beyond the danger zone, mainly due to overcharging of the

shot-holes as a result of certain special features of the local ground. Flying rocks

are encountered during initial and final blasting operations. Vibrations also lead to

displacement of adjoining areas. Dust and noise are also problems commonly

encountered during blasting operations.

7.3.1.2 Heavy Machinery

Most of the accidents during operation of dumpers, excavators and dozers and

other heavy vehicles are often attributable to mechanical failures and human

errors.

7.3.1.3 Storage of Explosives

The explosive magazine storage facility will be established within the proposed ML

area after necessary approval which will cater to the mining activities. For the

purpose of transportation of explosives, explosive van will be provided. The main

hazard associated with the storage, transport and handling of explosives is fire and


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


explosion. The rules as per the Indian Explosive Act-1983 and Explosive Rules-2008

should be followed for handling of explosives, which includes transportation, storage

and use of explosives.

7.3.1.4 Fuel Storage

Most of the HEMM will operate on diesel. However, no major storage is envisaged at

the ML area. A diesel bouser is provided for the crawler mounted machines

operating in the mine.

7.3.1.5 Water Logging

Water logging in the mine site can be avoided by adopting following measures:

• Position of water body should be correctly known; • Water from the surface water bodies should not be allowed to enter in the mines; • Draining of mine water by suitable capacity pumps; and • Surface water bodies should be correctly marked together with their highest flood level on the mine.

7.3.1.6 Safety Measures

� Safety Measures at the proposed Open Cast Mining Project

• The opencast mines have been planned for working with shovel dumper system

which requires proper benching not only for slope stability but also for

movement of dumpers and other heavy machinery. The inclination of the quarry

sides at the final stage i.e. at the dip most point will not exceed 600 to the

horizontal. (This angle is measured between the line joining the toe of the

bottom most bench to the crest of the top most bench and the horizontal line);

• The gradient of the haul road inside the pit, access trench and on the dumps will

not be steeper than 1 in 25;

• The quarries will be protected by garland drains around the periphery for storm

water drainage;

• All mining operations both within the quarry and outside will be conducted as

per the conditions laid down by DGMS and under the strict supervision of

competent persons appointed under Metaliferous Mines Regulation Act, 1961.

� Measures Suggested to Avoid Accidents due to Blasting

• The blasting operation shall be supervised by a competent person appointed for

the purpose;

• The blasting operation shall be strictly conducted as per the guideline given in

metalliferous mines regulation, 1961;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Demarcation of danger zone area falling within a radius of 500 m from the blast

site;

• All employee and equipment shall be cleared from the blast area and removed to

a safe location prior to any scheduled blasting;

• To prevent unauthorized entry, guards shall be posted at all access points

leading to the blast area;

• Audible signals such as sirens, whistles, etc. shall be used to warn employees,

visitors and neighbours about the scheduled blasting event.

• Sign boards showing “Blasting Time” to be exhibited at every entry to the mine


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


FIGURE-7.1

IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS IN OPEN CAST MINE

OPEN CAST MINE

DRILLING AND

BLASTING

EXPLOITATION OF ORE

TRANSPORTA

TION OF ORE TO

CRUSHING PLANT

ORE

CRUSHING PLANT

LOADING PLANT

ECOLOGICAL RISK

(LAND, AIR, WATER)

DUST

NOISE


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


� Measures to Prevent Accidents due to Trucks and Dumpers

• All transportation within the main working area should be carried out under

the direct supervision and control of the management;

• The vehicles must be maintained in good repairs and checked thoroughly at

least once a week by a competent person authorized for this purpose by the

management;

• Broad signs should be provided at each and every turning point specially for

the guidance of the drivers at night;

• To avoid dangers while reversing the trackless vehicles, especially at the

embankment and tripping points, all areas for reversing of lorries should, as

far as possible, be made man free, and there should be a light and sound

device to indicate reversing of trucks; and

• A statutory provision of the fence, constant education, training etc. will go a

long way in reducing the incidence of such accidents.

7.4 Disaster Management Plan

7.4.1 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan

The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of

environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage

operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the

Disaster Management Plan, it should be widely circulated and personnel training

through rehearsals/drills.

The objective of the Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined

resources of the mine and the outside services to achieve the following:

• The objective of onsite disaster management plan for the captive mine is to

be a state of perceptual readiness through training, development to

immediately control and arrest any emergency situations, so as to avert a full

fledged disaster and the consequence of human and property damage. In the

event of a disaster still occurring & to manage the same so that the risk of the

damage to life and property is minimized.

• JCCL have a demented procedure for Emergency preparedness & responses.

The emergency situations arising out of the situations as defined in the clause

shall be addressed in the document.

The salient features are elaborated as below:

• Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

• Safeguard other people;

• Minimize damage to property and the environment;

• Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;

• Identify any dead;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Provide for the needs of relatives;

• Provide authoritative information to the news media;

• Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and

• Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the

cause and circumstances of the emergency.

In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue rehabilitation and render

medical help and to restore normalcy.

� Emergency Organization

It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive (Mine

Manager) who has control over the affairs of the mine would be heading the

emergency organization. He would be designated as site controller. As per the

general organization chart, in the mines, the mines manager would be designated

as the incident controller. The incident Controller would be reporting to the site

controller.

Each incident controller, for himself, organizes a team responsible for controlling the

incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift In-charge would be the

reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence

Controller and Site Controller.

Emergency co-ordinators would be appointed who would undertake the

responsibilities like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide

essential and support services. For this purposes, security in-charge, personnel

department, essential services personnel would be engaged. All these personnel

would be designated as key personnel.

In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house in-charge and other

maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of

power or communication system failure, some of staff members in the mine offices

would be drafted and their services would be utilized as messengers for quick

passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential

personnel.

Following officers of the mines will be responsible for co-ordination in case of

emergency situated in any section of the mine. Emergency responses are give in

Table-7.1.

TABLE-7.1

EMERGENCY RESPONSES

Person Responsibility

Head of the department/ mine agent Site controller

Section In charge / mine manager Accident controller/ communication officer

Employee who gives the first information

about the incident/ accident

Primary controller

P & A Deptt. (HOD) Liaison officer


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire etc would

inform his immediate superior and Emergency control center. The person on duty in

the Emergency Control Center would appraise the site controller. Site controller

verifies the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the Shift In-charge

and takes a decision about an impending on site emergency. This would be

communicated to all the incident controllers, emergency co-ordinators.

Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the

instructions of the site controller.

Key Personnel and their Responsibility

• Site Controller

The head of the department/ mine agent shall have an overall responsibility for

controlling the incident/ accident and directing the personnel.

• To prepare a full proof plan for control of accident like, landslides, subsidence

flood and other natural calamities;

• To inform statutory bodies of the state and central government;

• To inform communication officer about the emergency, control center and

assembly point;

• To provide all assistance and call for fire squad, security officer and other

services required for removing/ control of danger;

• To ensure that all necessary personnel assemble at assembly point; and

• To make arrangements for medical treatment to the personnel got injured

seriously.

• Accident Controller/Mines Manager

• Mock rehearsal of management plan prepared for accident;

• To withdraw men/ machines from the affected area with priority for safety of

personnel, minimize damage to the machines, environment and loss of

material;

• To act as an accident controller to all the later arrived;

• To make a report based on the facts and figure and submit to the site

controller; and

• To communicate to the site in charge and make arrangement for

transportation of the injured personnel.

• Primary Controller

• To inform the accident controller/ mine manager from the nearest means of

communication about the location and the nature of accident;

• To assist in clearing any obstruction in relief of accident;

• To carry out all instructions of accident controller; and

• To provide first aid treatment and communicate to the shift in charge.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


7.4.2 Emergency Facilities

Emergency Control Center (ECC)

For the time being, mine office block is identified as emergency control center. it

would have external telephone, fax, telex facility. All the site controller/ incident

controller officers, senior personnel would be located here. Also, it would be an

elevated place.

The following information and equipment are to be provided at the emergency

control center (ECC):

• Intercom, telephone; • P and T telephone; • Safe contained breathing apparatus; • Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets; • Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications; • Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories; • Internal P and T, factory layout, site plan; • Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries; • Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, sources of safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable zones, escape routes;

• Hazard chart; • Emergency shut-down procedures; • Nominal roll of employees; • List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of emergency co-coordinators;

• Duties of key personnel; • Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator, essential employees; and

• Important address and telephone numbers including government agencies, neighboring industries and sources of help, out side experts, population details

around the mine.

• Assembly Point

Number of assembly depending upon the mine location would be identified wherein

employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management would be

assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus, minimum

facilities like water etc. would be organized.

In view of the size of mine, different locations should be ear marked as assembly

points. Depending upon the location of hazard, the assembly points are to be used.

• Emergency Power Supply

Power supply is drawn from the KSEB and captive power plant of the existing

cement plant. In the event of any supply failure, diesel generator will be provided,

which is operated as soon as any power failure occurs. Thus water pumps, mine

lighting and emergency control center, administrative building and other auxiliary

services are connected to emergency power supply.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Fire Fighting Facilities

First Aid Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained in

each operation areas of the mine as per statutory requirements.

• Location of Wind Sock

On the top of the administration block, windsocks would be installed to indicate

direction of wind for emergency escape.

• Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical

burns, fire burns etc would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the

emergency control room. Private medical practitioners help would be sought.

Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.

First aid facilities would be augmented. Names of medical personnel, medical

facilities in the area would be prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines

for emergency treatment of burns patients and for those affected by toxicity would

be maintained.

Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided

and maintained. The help of near by industrial management’s in this regard would

taken on mutual support basis.

• Ambulance

An ambulance with driver availability in all the shifts, emergency shift vehicle would

be ensured and maintained to transport injured or affected persons. Number of

persons would be trained in first aid so that, in every shift first aid personnel would

be available.

7.4.3 Emergency Actions

• Emergency Warning

Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the

mine and people outside. An emergency warning system would be established.

• Evacuation of Personnel

In the event of an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly

point. Operators have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time

Office maintains a copy of deployment of employees in each shift. If necessary,

persons can be evacuated by rescue teams.

• All Clear Signal

Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with incident controllers and

emergency co-ordinators, the site controller orders an all clear signal. When it


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


becomes essential, the site controller communicates to the district emergency

authority, police and fire service personnel regarding help required or development

of the situation into an off-site emergency.

7.4.4 General

• Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific

pattern. Employees would be provided with information related to fire hazards,

antidotes and first aid measures. Those who would designate as key personnel and

essential employees should be given training to emergency response.

• Co-ordination with Local Authorities

Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are

proposed. In the case of an onsite emergency, resources within the organization

would be mobilized and in the event extreme emergency local authorities help

should be sought.

In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority

and district emergency authority (normally the collector) would be appraised and

under his supervision, the offsite disaster management plan would be exercised. For

this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport,

personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations etc. would be mustered.

Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills should be organized.

• Mutual Aid

Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective

equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc should be sought from the

neighboring industrial management’s.

• Mock Drills

Emergency preparedness is an important aspect of planning in industrial disaster

management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally and

physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated procedures.

Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel should be trained in the

operations.

• Important Information

Important information such names and addresses of key personnel, essential

employees, medical personnel, transporters address, address of those connected

with offsite emergency such as police, local authorities, fire services, district

emergency authority should be prepared and maintained.

The on-site emergency organization chart for various emergencies is shown in

Figure-7.2.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


Operator

Shift Incharge

Safety Officer

Site ControllerRoom

Emergency Control

Emergency Co-ordinator Emergency Co-ordinator

(Medical,Mutual,Aid

Rehabilitation,Transportand Communication)

(Rescue,Fire Fighting)

Electrician, First Aid,Transport-Driver

Telephone-Operator

ElectricianPump Operator

Emergency Co-ordinator

(Essential Services)

Pump Operator

Shift Incharge

Incident Controller

FIGURE-7.2

ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


The task of preparing the off-site emergency plan lies with the district collector.

However the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district

authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.

• Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects which should be included in the emergency plan are:

• Organization

Details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centers, names and appointments of incident controller, site

main controller, their deputies and other key personnel

• Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, lists

of telephone numbers.

7.4.5 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

• Specialized Knowledge

Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call

e.g. those with specialized knowledge of fire control;

• Voluntary Organizations

Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc;

• Chemical Information

Details of the hazardous substances stored or procedure on each site and a

summary of the risk associated with them;

• Meteorological Information

Arrangements for obtaining details of whether conditions prevailing at the time and

whether forecasts;

• Humanitarian Arrangements

Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid,

ambulances, temporary mortuaries;

• Public Information

Arrangements for dealing with the media press office and informing relatives, etc;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


• Assessment

Arrangements for: (a) collecting information on the causes of the emergency; (b)

reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.

• Role of the Emergency Coordinating Officer

The various emergency services should be coordinated by an emergency

coordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The ECO

should liaise closely with the site main controller. The ECO should inform the DGMS

authorities in case of accidents as per the statutory requirement. Again depending

on local arrangements, for very severe incidents/accidents with major or prolonged

off-site consequences, the external control should be passed to a senior local

authority administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state

government.

• Role of the Local Authority

The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency

planning officer (EPO) appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole

range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO should liaise

with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. This

liaison should ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.

It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which

will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able

to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to

cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be

organized by the EPO.

• Role of Police

Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property

and controlling traffic movements. Their functions should include controlling

bystanders evacuating the public, identifying the dead and dealing with casualties,

and informing relatives of death or injury.

• Role of Fire Authorities

The control of a fire should be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade

officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller

on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer should also have a similar

responsibility for other events, such as explosions. Fire authorities in the region

should be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water

supply points and fire-fighting equipment. They should be involved in on-site

emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as observers of

exercises involving only site personnel.

• Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and so on,

should have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an

integral part of the emergency plan.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


For major fires, injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a

varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme

cases may be generally available in most hospitals.

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities

additional to those available locally, and a medical “mutual aid “scheme should exist

to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the event of an

emergency.

• Role of Government Safety Authority

This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to

want to satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the off-

site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types

including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented procedures

and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.

In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory

inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close

involvement in advising on operations in case involvement in advising on

operations.

The off-site emergency organization chart for major disaster is shown in Figure-

7.3.

Facilities Proposed at Mine Site

• Public address system;

• Telephones/ Mobile handsets;

• Runners/messenger;

• Emergency alarm;

• Fire fighting equipment & accessories with trained manpower;

• Training centre;

• Fire tender;

• Ambulance van; and

• Jeep van.

Facilities will be made available outside JCCL

� Government Hospitals at Shahabad at a distance of 3 km; and

� As per Risk Assessment studies the possibility of “Offsite” emergency situation

is ruled out as this proposed mine is not likely to pose any off-site emergency

hence does not call for any preparation of an off-site emergency plan.

Further the residential quarters and living area are far from the mine.

7.4.6 Care and Maintenance during Temporary Discontinuance

When the mine is temporarily discontinued due to any unforeseen circumstances

the following care and maintenance shall be carried out:-

� Notice to be served to all the concerned authority;


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


� The mining pit area shall be covered by temporary fencing;

� All access roads/ openings to the pit/ face shall be closed by parapet wall as per rule;

� Warning shall be displayed on the “Notice Board” at appropriate places;

� Security personnel shall be posted at every danger point;

� No unauthorized person shall be allowed to enter into the mine without prior permission of the management;

� Mine benches shall be dressed and properly sloped for its stability;

� Garland drain shall be made all around the mine and dumps to prevent water flow towards mine for prevention of land slide/side fall and siltation etc;

� All men and machinery shall be withdrawn from the mine and shall be kept in a compact and safe place; and

� All safety precautions shall be taken care of as per rule.


Chapter-7

Additional Studies


FIGURE-7.3

OFF-SITE EMERGENCY CHART


Chapter-8 Project Benefits


8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

The impact due to the proposed lime stone mine production on the civic amenities

will be substantial after limestone extraction from mine lease area. The basic

requirement of the community needs will be strengthened by extending health

care, educational facilities developed in the township to the community, providing

drinking water to the villages, building/strengthening of existing roads in the

area. JCCL will initiate the above amenities either by providing or by improving

the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the living standards of local

communities.

The construction of new roads in the project area will enhance the transportation

facilities. With improved transportation facilities there is always a scope for

development. The communication facilities will improve after the proposed mining

operations. The medical facilities would also be available to local people in the

surrounding in case of emergencies.

8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility

The activities which are proposed by M/s. JCCL to be taken up for upliftment of

surrounding areas of existing cement plant and proposed mines are given below:

- Infrastructure development;

- Education;

- Medical facilities;

- Sanitation;

- Community development and awareness programmes; and

- Vocational training in and around the project site.

� Infrastructure development

- Pure & safe drinking facilities;

- Improve the village sanitation system;

- Construction of suitable approach roads and bus shelters;

- Repair and diversion of the existing roads and drains; and

- Improve street and general lighting requirements.

� Education

• To upgrade the existing primary school;

• 10+2 CBSE school with a estimated cost of Rs. 8 crores;

• 10+2 Kannada school with an estimated cost of Rs. 2 crores;

• ITI with an estimated cost of about Rs. 5 crores;

• In addition to this, the following facilities will be provided:

� Development of play ground for children;

� -Sponsoring meritorious scholarship for students of college/ ITI/Polytechnic

etc;

� Stipend to females would continue even after marriage if education

continued;




� Organise computer training for the children / youth of weaker section;

� Up-gradation / Renovation of existing schools; and

� Providing water supply, furniture, computers, library, books, school bags,

sports kits etc.

The estimated budget for education facilities will be about Rs.15 crores.

� Medical facilities

- 20 bed hospital with complete facilities;

- Development of primary health centres;

- Ambulance to take patients to hospital in emergency situation;

- A mobile medical van to conduct health campaigns;

- Conducting Vaccination/ Immunization programmes including polio camps;

- First aid, free medicines, special concessions to the land affected people etc. and

- Eye camps.

The estimated cost for medical facilities during first three years will be about Rs. 12.

crores.

� Drinking water facility

- Pure and safe drinking water to meet daily household water requirement.

� Sanitation

- Proper sewerage system will be created and will start Suvidha Public Toilet (SPT)

at project site and adjoining villages.

� Vocational training

- Bakery, Papad and Agarbathi making;

- Candle making;

- Computer training;

- Fashion technology courses;

- Food preservation;

- Handicraft;

- Mushroom cultivation;

- Organise skill development and vocational training for enabling people to form

self help group;

- Spices grinding and packing;

- Tailoring embroidery classes to surrounding villagers;

- Training for girls and ladies of weaker section of society; and

- Welders.

� Self Employment

- Self help groups;

- Income generation schemes; and

- Setting up of fly ash brick plants will generate employment and income.




� Community welfare/ Panchayat halls

- Renovation and modernization of existing community/ panchayat halls;

- Assitance to Anganwadi centres;

- Provision of solar energy to community/panchayat buildings

� Communication

- Provision of public telephone booths in each village; and

- Provision of internet facility in the schools, community / panchayat halls.

� Religious places

- Keeping in view the regious values of villagers worship buildings as desired will

be constructed; and

- Provision of solar energy in worship buildings.

� Physically challenged

- Physically challenged persons would be shown avenues of employment by

facilitating requisite financial assistance;

- Organising camps and suitable training;

- Formation of self help groups;

- Oraganising sports activities; and

- Donate wheelchairs

Rs.150 crores is allotted for CSR activities by JCCL and will be spent on CSR

activities during construction phase of cement plant and 5 years during the

operation phase of the plant. Out of Rs. 150 Crores, Rs. 40 Lakhs is allocated under

proposed mine project. The expenditure includes the infrastructure developments

and recurring cost of various activities as mentioned in above sections.

An amount of Rs. 111.252 lakhs has been incurred so far for the community welfare

activities. Existing CSR activities will be strengthened further under proposed

project. The expenditure on socio-economic upliftment is given in Table-8.1. The

following photographs are showing CSR activities is given in Figure-8.1.

TABLE-8.1

THE EXPENDITURE ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC UPLIFTMENT

Financial Year Education Healthcare Environment

Sustainability

Community

Development

Amt Spend for Current

Year (Rs.in Lakhs)

2010-2011 0 0 0 2.98 2.98

2011-2012 6.23 3.24 0.00 0.08 9.54

2012-2013 0.00 6.42 43.44 32.15 82.01

2013-14 0.07 0.00 0.00 5.27 5.35

2014-15 0.79 0.24 0.00 6.53 7.56

2015-16 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.82 3.82

Total 111.252

Source: JCCL




8.3 Employment Potential

The impact of proposed mine on the economic aspects can be clearly observed.

The proposed project activities will provide employment to persons of different

skills and trades. The local population will have preference to get an employment.

The employment potential will ameliorate economic conditions of these families

directly and provide employment to many other families indirectly who are

involved in business and service oriented activities.

The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall

upgrade the prosperity of the region. These will in-turn improve the socio-

economic conditions of the area. The total manpower required for the proposed

project during operation is about 143 persons will be mainly sourced from local

community depending upon requirement & qualification in and around project

area and few technical persons will be also employed. In addition to the above,

contractual labour and indirect employment opportunities will also getting

benefited.

This project is expected to yield a positive impact on the socio-economic

environment of the region. It helps in sustainable development of this area

including further development of physical infrastructural facilities.

8.4 Rehabilitation of Human Settlements

No Rehabilitation of human settlements involved in the proposed mine lease area.




FIGURE-8.1(A)

CSR PHOTOGRAPHS

BASAVA SAMITHI HIGHER PRIMARY SCHOOL BASAVA SAMITHI HIGHER PRIMARY SCHOOL COMPETITION PRIZE DISTRIBUTION

BLOOD DONATION CAMP




FIGURE-8.1(B)

CSR PHOTOGRAPHS

EYE TESTING MACHINE HANDED OVER TO DIST

HOSPITAL GULBARGA HEALTH SCREENING CAMP

KENDRIYA VIDHYALAYA ELECTRONICS EQUIPMENT PROVIDED




FIGURE-8.1(C)

CSR PHOTOGRAPHS

PLANTATION PROGRAMME AT SCHOOL WELCOME ARCH SHAHABAD

CEMENT BAGS DONATED TO MOSQUE


Chapter-9 Administrative Aspects


9.0 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS

9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation

The mine will be supervised and controlled by the head, supported by General

Manager (plant operations) and manager (mines) and adequate team of

technically and statutorily qualified personnel apart from the operating staff of

skilled, semi skilled, unskilled and other categories.

Environment management cell will be headed by chief in-charge of mine and will

constitute manager (environment), horticulturist, geologist and a chemist. The

manager-environment will be responsible for regular environment management activities in the mine.

The organizational structure of environment cell for mine lease area is presented

in Figure-9.1.

The environmental engineer will be responsible for environment management

activities in the mine. As conscious of this, JCCL will create a department

consisting of officers from various disciplines to co-ordinate the activities

concerned with the management and implementation of the environmental

control measures.

Basically, this department will supervise the monitoring of environmental

pollution levels viz. ambient air quality, water and effluent quality, noise level

either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary.

In case the monitored results of environmental pollution found to exceed the

allowable limits, the environmental management cell will suggest remedial action

and get these suggestions implemented through the concerned authorities.

The environmental management cell will also co-ordinate all the related activities

such as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region,

afforestation and green belt development.


Chapter-9 Administrative Aspects


FIGURE-9.1

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENT CELL


Chapter-10 Summary & Conclusions


10.0 SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS

10.1 Need for the Project

Taranhalli limestone mine spread over an area of 631.311 ha is proposed with a

production capacity of 7.0 MTPA at Taranhalli and Shahabad villages, Chittapur

tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) district, Karnataka.

Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited (JCCL), formerly Zawar Cement Private

Limited (ZCPL), Gulbarga is setting up cement plant of 6.0 MTPA (3.0 MTPA each

in phase-I & II) along with 90 MW CPP at Bankur village, Chittapur tehsil,

Gulbarga District in Karnataka.

Taranhalli limestone deposit is a captive mine to fulfil the limestone requirement

of proposed cement plant being setup by Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited

(JCCL). The requirement of limestone is about 7.0 MTPA, to manufacture 4.6

MTPA clinker and 6.0 MTPA cement. The estimated cost for the proposed mining

project is about Rs. 30 Crores. This includes the EMP cost of Rs. 35 lakhs.

The proposed project will provide direct employment to about 143 numbers of

people. This project will also generate indirect employment to a considerable

number of families, who will render their services for the employees of the

project.

10.2 Project Justification

India is developing at a record growth rate of 10% GDP. To meet the requirement

of industrial, infrastructural, residential construction activities, JCCL develop

limestone mine to meet the raw material requirement of proposed cement plant

at Shahabad.

JCCL has proposed to manufacture of 4.60 MTPA clinker and 6.0 MTPA cement. In

this context of proposed clinker and cement production, the requirement of

limestone is 7.00 MTPA. Therefore, it is essential to limestone of 7.0 MTPA from

Taranhalli limestone mine.

10.3 Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation

• Air Impacts

No emissions other than particulate matter is envisaged which will be controlled by

the water sprinkling methods, by using closed conveyor belts during transportation,

dust suppression.

AIR ENVIRONMENT

Sr. No. Expected Impact Impact Zones Management Plan

1 Fugitive Dust

Emissions

Drilling

- Wet drilling technology

- Driller equipped with closed cabin personal protective gear to reduce occupational hazards





Blasting

Loading/unloading

Haul road/transport road Exposed OB /ore stock yard

Overall mine

- Controlled blasting method - Water spray prior to blasting - No blasting will be allowed in the

areas close to human habitation Water spray on mineral

ore/overburden material prior to loading - Provision of water sprinklers

- Development of green belt - Provision of water spray on dumper to arrest fine dust before it

is transported to crusher

2 Vehicular emissions Transportation of limestone from mine to cement plant will be by

closed belt conveyor

• Water Impacts

The water requirement for the proposed mine is about 125 KLD. (Sourced from

existing allocation of 6180 m3/day water from Kagina river) and water reservoir will

be developed in the Mine. Hence no ground water usage is involved. Water

conservation activities like rain water harvesting will be implemented in existing

cement plant and the same will be continued and developed for the proposed

project also. Proposed project will be operated on zero discharge concept.

WATER ENVIRONMENT


1 Ground water -- No ground water usage involved as the requirement of

125 KLD (source from existing

allocation of 6180 m3/day

water from Kagina river) and water reservoir will be

developed in the mine

2 Interruption of natural

drain

Drains in study

area

Drainage pattern is dendritic to

sub-dendritic in nature. The

area is drained by number of easterly flowing seasonal

streams, some of which join a

water body i.e Nandana halla near Shahabad town and

finally reached Kagina river.

These nallahs not pose any problem and also, there is no

threat of water pollution during

mining operation

3 Ground water

intersection

Ground water

table

The workings area proposed

upto 390 m RL during plan

period and the ground water level is below 350 m RL.

Hence, no ground water will be

encountered.

4 Discharge of mine - No discharge of mine drainage





drainage water water. Hence, no contamination.

5 Waste water generation - Mining activities

- Domestic

- Dust suppression

- Green belt

development

- No wastewater generation

Sanitary waste

water treated in soak pit

The domestic wastewater will be utilized for dust suppression

and greenbelt development.

The plant will be operated on

the concept of zero discharge

LAND ENVIRONMENT


1 Human habitation in core

& buffer zone

-- ML area: 631.311 ha

Acquisition of land under

process. Site is more or less

plain and will not require any

major cutting or filling

Plantation will be done on 7.5 m safety zone and backfilled

area.

2 Forest in core and buffer

zone

- The present land use is under

agricultural use. The land will

be converted into industrial use. There is no forest land in

ML.

3 Quantity of top soil - Nearly 1.128 m3 of soil is

estimated to generated during

first five years. A part of

which will be utilized for formation of bund and

remaining will be temporarily

stacked at southern side

NOISE ENVIRONMENT


1 Noise generation

sources:

- Screening

- Crushing

- Conveyor belt

Noise modeling

predictions have been

done using Dhwani model and the

predictions state that

the high noise levels are limited to work

zone only.

At the corners of the

ML boundary, noise

levels are expected to be ranging between

40 dB (A) to 44 dB

(A).

Adequate protective measure

- ear muffs/ ear plugs - sound barriers, use of

enclosures with suitable

absorption material in building layout

- Greenbelt development to

attenuate the noise levels




• Solid Waste

There is no waste handling during the plan period except top soil. No surface

dumping is proposed for the plan period, as there is no waste generation. A part

of the generated top soil will be utilized for formation of bund and remaining

quantity will be temporarily stacked at southern side of lease area, subsequently,

the preserved top soil shall be utilized for back filling on worked out benches as

per requirement.

10.4 Conclusions

The proposed mining project will have marginal impacts on the local environment

with proper mitigation measures with the effective implementation of the

environment management measures as suggested in the EIA/EMP report and as

recommended by MoEF, CPCB and State Pollution Control Board, the negative

impacts will be minimized to a great extent. However, development of this project

has beneficial impact/effects in terms growth in regional economy, transform the

region's economy from predominantly agricultural to significantly industrial,

increase Government earnings and revenues and accelerate the pace of industrial

development in the region.

The proposed project will provide direct employment to about 143 number of

personnel. This project will also generate indirect employment to a considerable

number of families, who will render their services for the employees of the

project.

The project will also encourage ancillary industries in the region, which will not

only increase the employment potential but also the economic base of the region

will be further strengthened.

Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project, the proposed project is

most advantageous to the region as well as to the nation.


Chapter-11 Disclosure of Consultants


11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

11.1 Introduction

The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan

(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. Studies

have been carried out by engaging scientists/engineers/experts of Vimta Labs

Limited, India and its empanelled associates.

The profile of the consultants is given below:

11.2 Vimta Labs Limited - Environment Consultant

Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research

laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the

areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, pre-

clinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular

biology services and research & development studies.

The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide

better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable

development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural

resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and

consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multi-disciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical

equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and

encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.

With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a

single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.

11.2.1 The Quality Policy

• VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in

its testing, validation and research services;

• VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,

impartiality and integrity in its operations;

• VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international

norms;

• VIMTA shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable

Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to

generate technically valid results/data; and

• VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and

procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.

11.2.2 Services Offered

Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad

(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural




facility of the central laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated instruments

backed by an excellent team of professionals.

Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at

Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under

one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing

and research sector.

VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad VIMTA Life Sciences, Genome Valley, Hyderabad

Vimta offers services under the following specializations:

• Environment;

• Analytical;

• Clinical Reference Lab;

• Clinical Research;

• Preclinical;

• Molecular Biology; and

• Research and Development.

The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over

India and other countries including a strong association with international

consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc. - USA, Rudal Blanchard – UK, E&E Solutions – Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait National

Petroleum Corporation – Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants – Saudi Arabia and

others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:

• Recognition by BIS, India;

• Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and

various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable);

• Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL);

• Accreditation by QCI/NABET;

• Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;

• Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;

• Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;

• Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania; • Accreditation by NCTCF;

• Certification from Standard Australia;

• Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;




• Recognition from USFDA;

• Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;

• Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines; and

• Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO).

11.2.3 Environment Division

Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services

offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of

industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit

of a green globe. The services under environment include:

• Site selection and liability studies;

• Environmental impact assessments;

• Environment management plans;

• Carrying capacity based regional studies;

• Environmental audits;

• Solid and hazardous waste management;

• Risk assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & disaster management plans;

• Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;

• Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and

socio-economics;

• Industrial emission source monitoring;

• Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments; • Marine ecological studies;

• Marine impact assessment;

• Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;

• Forestry and ecological studies;

• Geological and hydro-geological studies;

• Land use /land cover studies based on remote sensing;

• Socio-economic studies;

• Due diligence studies;

• Industrial epidemiological studies;

• Wasteland management studies; and

• Study on bio-indicators.







The services under environmental chemistry include:

� Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per

international codes;

� Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;

� Analysis of dioxins and furans;

� Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCB’s, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;

� Categorization of hazardous waste; and

� Pesticide residue analysis.

11.2.4 Facilities of Environment Division

Vimta-Environment division is located in scientifically designed central laboratory

with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor

and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of

environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team

of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social

planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.

Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as fine dust samplers, respirable

dust samplers (RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring

kits, personal samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major

specialized equipment include:

• Monostatic sodar–designed by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;

• Integrated noise level meters–Quest, U.S.A;

• Flue gas analyzers–Testo, Germany;

• 113-A Gravimetric dust sampler-Casella, London;

• ICP AES– Varian, USA;

• Gas liquid chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPD–Varian, USA;

• Gas chromatograph with mass detector–Varian, USA;

• Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]–Varian, USA;

• PAS-AFC-123 instrument;

• High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);

• Laser particle size analyzer;

• Bomb calorimeter;

• Polarographs;

• X-ray fluorescent spectrometer;

• Flame photometer;

• Carbon sulphur analyzer;

• Computerized fatigue testing machine;

• Electronic universal testing machine;

• Fourier transmission infrared spectroscope; and

• Water flow current meter – make Lawrence & Mayo.

11.2.5 Quality Systems

The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are

accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India

and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on quality

systems.

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Taranhalli Limestone Mining Capacity of 7.00 MTPA with ML Area of 631.311 ha at Taranhalli and Shahabad Villages, Chittapur Tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) District, Karnataka



The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report is presented below:

DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP STUDY – VIMTA LABS LTD

Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

1 Mr. M. Janardhan M.Tech (Env. Engg)

Vice President & Head (Env)

Co-ordination About 24 years of experience in the field of environmental management and environmental engineering

2 Dr. B. Chandra Sekhar M.Sc., Ph.D Sr. Manager Co-ordination About 14 years of experience in the field of environmental management and modeling

3 Mr. G. V. Raghava Rao M.Tech (Env) Manager Expert About 15 years of experience in the field of environmental management and environmental engineering

4 Mr. S. Srinivas Goud M.S.W Group Leader Expert About 23 years of experience in the field of social impact assessment studies.

5 Ms. Bh. Durga Bhavani M. Sc., M.Tech

(Env Mgt)

Group Leader Expert About 13 years of experience in the field of Environmental

Management and Environmental Chemistry

6 Mr. S.Kishore Kumar M.Tech (Env) Group Leader Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management and engineering

7 Mr.Rajashekar M. Sc Env Scientist Expert About 11 years of experience in ecological and biodiversity studies

8 Dr. M. Subba Reddy Ph.D (Env. Chem)

Sr. Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry

9 Mr. M. Raja Manohar M.Tech (Env ) Env Engineer Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management and engineering

10 Mr. P. Rama Krishna M.Tech (env) Env Engineer Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environment Management and engineering

11 Mr. Ch. Narendra M.S.W Scientist Expert About 2 years of experience in the field of Social Impact Assessment Studies

12 Mr. K.S. Vishnu Teja M.Tech (Env) Engineer Expert About 3 year of experience in the field of environment management

13 Mr. M. Praveen Kumar M.E (Env) Engineer Expert About 2 year of experience in the field of environment management

14 Mr. J. Sunil Kumar M.Tech (Env) Engineer Expert About 2 year of experience in the field of environment management

15 Mr. K.Rajeswar M.Sc (Geo) Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of geology and hydrogeology

16 Mr. Chavan Sanjay Kumar Laxman

M.Sc. (Env. Science)

Scientist Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental Management and Environmental Chemistry

17 Ms. T. Ramya Devi B.Sc Quality Auditor Quality Check About 5 years of experience in quality assurance

18 Mr. P. Niranjan Babu B.Com Dy Manager Secretarial Support About 25 years of experience in the field of environmental monitoring and secretarial support

19 Mr. P. Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 16 years experience in the field of environmental management and civil drawings

20 Mr. J. Rama Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 15 years experience in the field of environmental management

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Taranhalli Limestone Mining Capacity of 7.00 MTPA with ML Area of 631.311 ha at Taranhalli and Shahabad Villages, Chittapur Tehsil, Gulbarga (Kalaburagi) District, Karnataka



Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

and civil drawings

Empanelled Experts 21 Mr. V.K.Bhatnagar B.Sc. (Mining

Engineering)

Empanelled

Consultant

Expert About 40 years of experience in the field of mining engineering,

geology and soil

22 Mr. J. Rajendra Prasad M.Sc. (Applied Geology)

Empanelled Consultant

Expert About 20 years of experience in the field of landuse and landcover, satellite data interpretation and detailed hydrology & hydrogeology

(representing multi-tech services)

23 Mr. Rajgopal Krishnan M.Tech (Chemical

Engineering)

Empanelled Consultant

Expert About 42 years of experience in the field of risk assessment and hazardous management

24 Mr. Balakrishna Lole M.Sc. (Ag) Empanelled

Consultant

Expert About 35 years of experience in the field of Soil Conservation

Documents

FINAL REPORT AFTER PUBLIC HEARINGenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/07102016… · · 2016-10-07JAYPEE CEMENT CORPORATION LIMITED (JCCL) GULBARGA ... 2.13 Resource Requirement